Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces within three-dimensional environments

Abstract

While displaying a first three-dimensional application volume in a first view of the three-dimensional environment, in response to detecting occurrence of a first event: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, a computer system displays a first user interface object at a first location on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, the computer system displays the first user interface object at a second location on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

Description

DEVICES, METHODS, AND GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES FOR INTERACTING WITH VOLUMETRIC APPLICATION USER INTERFACES WITHIN THREE-DIMENSIONAL ENVIRONMENTSRELATED APPLICATIONS

[0001] This application is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 19 / 226,051, filed June 2, 2025, which claims the benefit of and priority to U.S. Patent Application No. 63 / 808,126, filed on May 19, 2025, and U.S. Patent Application No. 63 / 657,710, filed on June 7, 2024, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.TECHNICAL FIELD

[0002] The present disclosure relates generally to computer systems that are in communication with a display generation component and, optionally, one or more input devices that provide computer-generated experiences, including, but not limited to, electronic devices that provide virtual reality and mixed reality experiences via a display.BACKGROUND

[0003] The development of computer systems for augmented reality has increased significantly in recent years. Example augmented reality environments include at least some virtual elements that replace or augment the physical world. Input devices, such as cameras, controllers, joysticks, touch-sensitive surfaces, and touch-screen displays for computer systems and other electronic computing devices are used to interact with virtual / augmented reality environments. Example virtual elements include virtual objects, such as digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics.SUMMARY

[0004] Some methods and interfaces for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces within environments that include at least some virtual elements (e.g., applications, augmented reality environments, mixed reality environments, and virtual reality environments) are cumbersome, inefficient, and limited. For example, systems that do not provide affordances and / or user interface elements for interacting within an application volume of a volumetric application user interface and / or provide insufficient feedback forperforming actions associated with virtual objects, systems that require a series of inputs to achieve a desired outcome in an augmented reality environment, and systems in which manipulation of virtual objects are complex, tedious, and error-prone, create a significant cognitive burden on a user, and detract from the experience with the virtual / augmented reality environment. In addition, these methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy of the computer system. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

[0005] Accordingly, there is a need for computer systems with improved methods and interfaces for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces that make interaction with the computer systems more efficient and intuitive for a user. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces when providing extended reality experiences to users. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and / or nature of the inputs from a user by helping the user to understand the connection between provided inputs and device responses to the inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.

[0006] The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for computer systems are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed systems. In some embodiments, the computer system is a desktop computer with an associated display. In some embodiments, the computer system is a portable device (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the computer system is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch, or a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the computer system has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more cameras. In some embodiments, the computer system has a touch- sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more eye-tracking components. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more hand-tracking components. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more output devices in addition to the display generation component, the output devices including one or more tactile output generators and / or one or more audio output devices. In some embodiments, the computer system has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI through a stylus and / or finger contactsand gestures on the touch-sensitive surface, movement of the user’ s eyes and hand in space relative to the GUI (and / or computer system) or the user’s body as captured by cameras and other movement sensors, and / or voice inputs as captured by one or more audio input devices. In some embodiments, the functions performed through the interactions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and / or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory and / or non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0007] There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces within a three-dimensional environment. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for interacting with volumetric application user interfaces within a three-dimensional environment. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and / or the nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery- operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0008] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment. The first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application. The method includes, while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event. The method includes, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met as a result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying a first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location is on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met asthe result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location is on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

[0009] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment. The first view of the three-dimensional environment includes first application content that corresponds to a first application. The method includes, while displaying the first application content that corresponds to the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting a first change in position of attention of a user relative to the first application content. The method includes, in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of a first boundary that confines the first application content in two or more dimensions than to a second portion of the first boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the first boundary relative to the second portion of the first boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to the second portion of the first boundary than the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the second portion of the first boundary relative to the first portion of the first boundary.

[0010] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment. The first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application. The first three-dimensional application volume has a first size at a first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three- dimensional environment. Three-dimensional application content of the first application is confined within the first three-dimensional application volume. The method includes, while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to a second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user. The method includes, in response to detecting the first user input that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a second size of the first three-dimensional application volume that is different from the first size of the first three-dimensional application volume.

[0011] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment. The first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a respective application, and a first user interface object that is displayed at a first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume. The method includes while displaying the first user interface object at the first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, detecting movement of a current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint. The method includes, in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria include a requirement that the first three- dimensional application volume is a first type of application volume in order to for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that the first three-dimensional application volume is a second type of application volume in order for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position anddisplaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the third position is different from the first position and the second position.

[0012] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application. The first three-dimensional application volume confines content of the first application, including a first portion of the content of the first application and a second portion of the content of the first application, in two or more dimensions. The method includes while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, including the first three-dimensional application volume that confines the content of the first application in the two or more dimensions, detecting that user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application. The method includes, in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

[0013] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes a first three-dimensional volume that includes three-dimensional virtual content. The method includes while displaying the first three- dimensional volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event for displaying a first user interface object associated with the firstthree-dimensional volume. The method includes, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a first type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location has a first spatial relationship to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a second type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second type of content is different from the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a second location in the three- dimensional environment, wherein the second location has a second spatial relationship, different from the first spatial relationship, to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

[0014] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment. The first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user. The method includes while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first request to display a first user interface element. The method includes, in response to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a second distance, different from the first distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for thefirst user interface element that is different from the first size for the first user interface element.

[0015] A method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes three-dimensional virtual content and a two- dimensional user interface element. The method includes while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs that correspond to a first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from a first location in the three-dimensional environment to a second location in the three- dimensional environment. The method includes moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs and changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation, different from the first orientation, relative to the three-dimensional virtual content.

[0016] Note that the various embodiments described above can be combined with any other embodiments described herein. The features and advantages described in the specification are not all inclusive and, in particular, many additional features and advantages will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art in view of the drawings, specification, and claims. Moreover, it should be noted that the language used in the specification has been principally selected for readability and instructional purposes, and may not have been selected to delineate or circumscribe the inventive subject matter.BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0017] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0018] Figure 1 A is a block diagram illustrating an operating environment of a computer system for providing extended reality (XR) experiences in accordance with some embodiments.

[0019] Figures IB- IP are examples of a computer system for providing XR experiences in the operating environment of Figure 1A.

[0020] Figure 2 is a block diagram illustrating a controller of a computer system that is configured to manage and coordinate an XR experience for the user in accordance with some embodiments.

[0021] Figure 3 A is a block diagram illustrating a display generation component of a computer system that is configured to provide a visual component of the XR experience to the user in accordance with some embodiments.

[0022] Figures 3B-3G illustrate the use of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) to perform operations.

[0023] Figure 4 is a block diagram illustrating a hand tracking unit of a computer system that is configured to capture gesture inputs of the user in accordance with some embodiments.

[0024] Figure 5 is a block diagram illustrating an eye tracking unit of a computer system that is configured to capture gaze inputs of the user in accordance with some embodiments.

[0025] Figure 6 is a flow diagram illustrating a glint-assisted gaze tracking pipeline in accordance with some embodiments.

[0026] Figures 7A-7O illustrate example techniques for displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0027] Figures 8A-8X illustrate example techniques for displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0028] Figures 9A-9P illustrate example techniques for scaling of a volumetric application user interface within a three-dimensional environment, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0029] Figures 10A-10I illustrate example techniques for changing a display location of a user interface element based on a change in a viewpoint of the user, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0030] Figures 11 A-l IT illustrate example techniques for resolving spatial conflicts between content elements within a three-dimensional environment with respect to a viewpoint of the user, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0031] Figures 12A-12G are flow diagrams of methods of displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0032] Figures 13A-13G are flow diagrams of methods of displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0033] Figures 14A-14H are flow diagrams of methods of scaling of a volumetric application user interface within a three-dimensional environment, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0034] Figures 15A-15F are flow diagrams of methods of changing a display location of a user interface element based on a change in a viewpoint of the user, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0035] Figures 16A-16C are flow diagrams of methods of resolving spatial conflicts between content elements within a three-dimensional environment with respect to a viewpoint of the user, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0036] Figures 17A-17M illustrate example user interface elements associated with different types of contents of a volumetric application, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0037] Figures 18A-18AA illustrate example examples of displaying a user interface element with a size that is based on a distance from a viewpoint of the user and / or a distancefrom a respective portion of an application user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0038] Figures 19A-19N illustrate example techniques for orienting two-dimensional user interface elements within a three-dimensional application volume when the three- dimensional application volume is moved with respect to the three-dimensional environment, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0039] Figure 20 is a flow diagram of methods of displaying user interface elements associated with different types of contents of a volumetric application, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0040] Figure 21 is a flow diagram of methods of displaying a user interface element with a size that is based on a distance from a viewpoint of the user and / or a distance from a respective portion of an application user interface, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0041] Figure 22 is a flow diagram of methods of orienting two-dimensional user interface elements within a three-dimensional application volume when the three-dimensional application volume is moved with respect to the three-dimensional environment, in accordance with various embodiments.DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

[0042] The present disclosure relates to user interfaces for providing an extended reality (XR) experience to a user, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0043] The systems, methods, and GUIs described herein improve user interface interactions with virtual / augmented reality environments in multiple ways.

[0044] In some embodiments, a computer system displays a representation of a three- dimensional application (e.g., also referred to herein as a three-dimensional application volume) in a three-dimensional environment, and determines whether to display an alert or other user interface object for a user near an edge of the three-dimensional application or within the three-dimensional application based on a position of the user in the three- dimensional environment. For example, if the user is at a viewpoint that is near a boundary of the representation of the three-dimensional application, the alert or user interface object is displayed near an edge of the representation of the three-dimensional application; and if the user is at a viewpoint that is outside of a threshold distance of the representation of the three-dimensional application, the alert or user interface object is displayed at a position within the representation of the three-dimensional application. Automatically determining a position at which to display an alert or other user interface object relative to a displayed three- dimensional application makes it easier for the user to view and / or interact with alert or other user interface object without requiring the user to change the user’s viewpoint of the three- dimensional environment, thereby improving the visibility of the alert or other user interface element and providing the user with additional information and / or control options without visually obscuring the three-dimensional application unnecessarily.

[0045] In some embodiments, the computer system displays application content in a three-dimensional environment such that, in response to detecting the user’s attention being directed to and / or near a portion of the application content, the system displays visual emphasis of a boundary of the application content to provide the user with improved visual feedback that the user’s attention is detected near the application content. Automatically displaying visual emphasis of at least a portion of the boundary of the application content in response to detecting the user’s attention directed to the application content improves the visibility of the application content and defines the boundary of the application content such that the user is aware of where the application content begins and / or ends without requiring additional user inputs for the user to explore the application content within the three- dimensional environment. Additionally, visually emphasizing a portion of a boundary relative to another portion of the boundary based on the user’s attention moving closer to the portion of the boundary reduces the number of inputs and amount of time needed for the user to locate one or more affordances that perform different operations on the application user interface without displaying additional controls.

[0046] In some embodiments, a computer system displays a three-dimensional application volume in a three-dimensional environment with a different size based on moving the three-dimensional application volume to a different depth relative to the user’s viewpoint. For example, moving the three-dimensional application volume to a depth in the three- dimensional environment that is farther away from the user’s viewpoint causes the system to increase a size of the three-dimensional application volume while the three-dimensional application volume is displayed at the increased depth. Automatically updating a size of the three-dimensional application volume in response to a change in the depth at which the three-dimensional application volume is displayed improves the visibility and legibility of the application volume without requiring additional user input.

[0047] In some embodiments, a computer system repositions user interface elements around a three-dimensional application volume in a three-dimensional environment based on movement of the viewpoint of the user relative to the three-dimensional application volume. Automatically repositioning user interface elements for a displayed three-dimensional application based on a current viewpoint of the user improves the visibility of and makes it easier for the user to access the user interface elements even as the viewpoint of the user moves relative to the three-dimensional application, which reduces the amount of time and extent of inputs needed for the user to access control options for the three-dimensional application even from a different viewpoint relative to the three-dimensional application.

[0048] In some embodiments, a computer system changes one or more visual properties of a first portion of content within a three-dimensional application volume in response to detecting that another portion of the content of the volumetric application has user interface focus and is behind the first portion of the content from a viewpoint of the user. Changing one or more visual properties of a first portion of the content of a volumetric application to increase a visibility of another portion of the content of the volumetric application that has user interface focus and is behind the first portion of the content from a viewpoint of the user reduces the number of inputs and amount of time needed to display relevant information to the user while maintaining display of depth information within the volumetric application, without displaying additional controls.

[0049] In some embodiments, a computer system displays a first user interface object, associated with a first type of content, at a first location in the three-dimensional environment that has a first spatial relationship to a three-dimensional volume displayed in the three- dimensional environment, and displays the first user interface object, associated with a second type of content, at a second location in the three-dimensional environment that has a second spatial relationship to the three-dimensional volume displayed in the three- dimensional environment. Changing a location of where the first user interface object is displayed provides improved feedback to the user while automatically providing display of pertinent information to the user without displaying additional controls.

[0050] In some embodiments, a computer system displaying a first user interface element at a first distance from a first viewpoint of the user with a first size and displaying the first user interface element a second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size. Changing a size of a displayed user interface element provides improved feedback to the user by ensuring that the first user interface element can be more easily viewed by the user and helps to maintain display of depth information within the volumetric application, without displaying additional controls.

[0051] In some embodiments, a computer system changes an orientation of a two- dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content in response to the movement of the three-dimensional virtual content. Changing an orientation of a two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three- dimensional virtual content to a second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content reduces the number of inputs and amount of time needed to display relevant information to the user while providing improved feedback by displaying information at an orientation that allows the first user interface element to be more easily viewed by the user, without displaying additional controls.

[0052] Figures 1 A-6 provide a description of example computer systems for providing XR experiences to users (such as described below with respect to methods 12000. 13000, 14000, 15000, and / or 16000). Figures 7A-7O illustrate examples of displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport. Figures 12A- 12G are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 12000 for displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport. The user interfaces in Figures 7B-7O are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 12A-12G. Figures 8A-8X illustrate examples of displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application. Figures 13A-13G are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 13000 for displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application. The user interfaces in Figures 8A-8X are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 13A-13G. Figures 9A-9P illustrate examples of scaling of a volumetric application user interface within a three-dimensional environment. Figures 14A-14H are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 14000 for scaling of a volumetric application user interface within a three-dimensional environment. The user interfaces in Figures 9A-9P are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 14A-14H. Figures 10A-10I illustrate examples of changing a display location of a user interface element based on a change in a viewpoint of the user. Figures 15A-15F are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 12000 for changing a display location of a user interface element based on a change in a viewpoint of the user. The user interfaces in Figures 10A-10I are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 15A-15F. Figures 11 A-l IF illustrate examples of resolving spatial conflicts between content elements within a three- dimensional environment with respect to a viewpoint of the user. Figures 16A-16C are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 16000 for resolving spatial conflicts between content elements within a three-dimensional environment with respect to a viewpoint of the user. The user interfaces in Figures 11 A-l IF are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 16A-16C. Figures 17A-17M illustrate examples of example user interface elements associated with different types of contents of a volumetric application. Figure 20 is flow diagrams of an exemplary method 20000 for displaying a user interface element with a size that is based on a distance from a viewpoint of the user and / or a distance from a respective portion of an application user interface. Figures 18A-18AA illustrate examples of displaying a user interface element with a size that is based on a distance from a viewpoint of the user and / or a distance from a respective portion of an application user interface. Figures 21 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method 21000 for displaying a user interface element with a size that is based on a distance from a viewpoint of the user and / or a distance from a respective portion of an application user interface. Figures 19A-19N illustrate examples of orienting two-dimensional user interface elements within a three-dimensional application volume when the three-dimensional application volume is moved with respect to the three-dimensional environment. Figure 22 is a flow diagram of an exemplary method 22000 for orienting two-dimensional user interface elements within a three-dimensional application volume when the three-dimensional application volume is moved with respect to the three-dimensional environment.

[0053] The processes described below enhance the operability of the devices and make the user-device interfaces more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the device) through various techniques, including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing thenumber of inputs needed to perform an operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, improving privacy and / or security, providing a more varied, detailed, and / or realistic user experience while saving storage space, and / or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and improve battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Saving on battery power, and thus weight, improves the ergonomics of the device. These techniques also enable real-time communication, allow for the use of fewer and / or less precise sensors resulting in a more compact, lighter, and cheaper device, and enable the device to be used in a variety of lighting conditions. These techniques reduce energy usage, thereby reducing heat emitted by the device, which is particularly important for a wearable device where a device well within operational parameters for device components can become uncomfortable for a user to wear if it is producing too much heat.

[0054] In addition, in methods described herein where one or more steps are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met, it should be understood that the described method can be repeated in multiple repetitions so that over the course of the repetitions all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met in different repetitions of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step if a condition is satisfied, and a second step if the condition is not satisfied, then a person of ordinary skill would appreciate that the claimed steps are repeated until the condition has been both satisfied and not satisfied, in no particular order. Thus, a method described with one or more steps that are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met could be rewritten as a method that is repeated until each of the conditions described in the method has been met. This, however, is not required of system or computer readable medium claims where the system or computer readable medium contains instructions for performing the contingent operations based on the satisfaction of the corresponding one or more conditions and thus is capable of determining whether the contingency has or has not been satisfied without explicitly repeating steps of a method until all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met. A person having ordinary skill in the art would also understand that, similar to a method with contingent steps, a system or computer readable storage medium can repeat the steps of a method as many times as are needed to ensure that all of the contingent steps have been performed.

[0055] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 1 A, the XR experience is provided to the user via an operating environment 100 that includes a computer system 101. The computer system 101 includes a controller 110 (e.g., processors of a portable electronic device or a remote server), a display generation component 120 (e.g., a head-mounted device (HMD), a display, a projector, a touch-screen, etc.), one or more input devices 125 (e.g., an eye tracking device 130, a hand tracking device 140, other input devices 150), one or more output devices 155 (e.g., speakers 160, tactile output generators 170, and other output devices 180), one or more sensors 190 (e.g., image sensors, light sensors, depth sensors, tactile sensors, orientation sensors, proximity sensors, temperature sensors, location sensors, motion sensors, velocity sensors, etc.), and optionally one or more peripheral devices 195 (e.g., home appliances, wearable devices, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and peripheral devices 195 are integrated with the display generation component 120 (e.g., in a head-mounted device or a handheld device).

[0056] When describing an XR experience, various terms are used to differentially refer to several related but distinct environments that the user may sense and / or with which a user may interact (e.g., with inputs detected by a computer system 101 generating the XR experience that cause the computer system generating the XR experience to generate audio, visual, and / or tactile feedback corresponding to various inputs provided to the computer system 101). The following is a subset of these terms:

[0057] Physical environment: A physical environment refers to a physical world that people can sense and / or interact with without aid of electronic systems. Physical environments, such as a physical park, include physical articles, such as physical trees, physical buildings, and physical people. People can directly sense and / or interact with the physical environment, such as through sight, touch, hearing, taste, and smell.

[0058] Extended reality: In contrast, an extended reality (XR) environment refers to a wholly or partially simulated environment that people sense and / or interact with via an electronic system. In XR, a subset of a person’s physical motions, or representations thereof, are tracked, and, in response, one or more characteristics of one or more virtual objects simulated in the XR environment are adjusted in a manner that comports with at least one law of physics. For example, an XR system may detect a person’s head turning and, in response, adjust graphical content and an acoustic field presented to the person in a manner similar tohow such views and sounds would change in a physical environment. In some situations (e.g., for accessibility reasons), adjustments to characteristic(s) of virtual object(s) in an XR environment may be made in response to representations of physical motions (e.g., vocal commands). A person may sense and / or interact with an XR object using any one of their senses, including sight, sound, touch, taste, and smell. For example, a person may sense and / or interact with audio objects that create a 3D or spatial audio environment that provides the perception of point audio sources in 3D space. In another example, audio objects may enable audio transparency, which selectively incorporates ambient sounds from the physical environment with or without computer-generated audio. In some XR environments, a person may sense and / or interact only with audio objects.

[0059] Examples of XR include virtual reality and mixed reality.

[0060] Virtual reality: A virtual reality (VR) environment refers to a simulated environment that is designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory inputs for one or more senses. A VR environment comprises a plurality of virtual objects with which a person may sense and / or interact. For example, computer-generated imagery of trees, buildings, and avatars representing people are examples of virtual objects. A person may sense and / or interact with virtual objects in the VR environment through a simulation of the person’s presence within the computer-generated environment, and / or through a simulation of a subset of the person’s physical movements within the computer-generated environment.

[0061] Mixed reality: In contrast to a VR environment, which is designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory inputs, a mixed reality (MR) environment refers to a simulated environment that is designed to incorporate sensory inputs from the physical environment, or a representation thereof, in addition to including computer-generated sensory inputs (e.g., virtual objects). On a virtuality continuum, a mixed reality environment is anywhere between, but not including, a wholly physical environment at one end and virtual reality environment at the other end. In some MR environments, computer-generated sensory inputs may respond to changes in sensory inputs from the physical environment. Also, some electronic systems for presenting an MR environment may track location and / or orientation with respect to the physical environment to enable virtual objects to interact with real objects (that is, physical articles from the physical environment or representations thereof). Forexample, a system may account for movements so that a virtual tree appears stationary with respect to the physical ground.

[0062] Examples of mixed realities include augmented reality and augmented virtuality.

[0063] Augmented reality: An augmented reality (AR) environment refers to a simulated environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed over a physical environment, or a representation thereof. For example, an electronic system for presenting an AR environment may have a transparent or translucent display through which a person may directly view the physical environment. The system may be configured to present virtual objects on the transparent or translucent display, so that a person, using the system, perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. Alternatively, a system may have an opaque display and one or more imaging sensors that capture images or video of the physical environment, which are representations of the physical environment. The system composites the images or video with virtual objects, and presents the composition on the opaque display. A person, using the system, indirectly views the physical environment by way of the images or video of the physical environment, and perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. As used herein, a video of the physical environment shown on an opaque display is called “pass-through video,” meaning a system uses one or more image sensor(s) to capture images of the physical environment, and uses those images in presenting the AR environment on the opaque display. Further alternatively, a system may have a projection system that projects virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as a hologram or on a physical surface, so that a person, using the system, perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. An augmented reality environment also refers to a simulated environment in which a representation of a physical environment is transformed by computer-generated sensory information. For example, in providing pass-through video, a system may transform one or more sensor images to impose a select perspective (e.g., viewpoint) different than the perspective captured by the imaging sensors. As another example, a representation of a physical environment may be transformed by graphically modifying (e.g., enlarging) portions thereof, such that the modified portion may be representative but not photorealistic versions of the originally captured images. As a further example, a representation of a physical environment may be transformed by graphically eliminating or obfuscating portions thereof.

[0064] Augmented virtuality: An augmented virtuality (AV) environment refers to a simulated environment in which a virtual or computer-generated environment incorporates one or more sensory inputs from the physical environment. The sensory inputs may be representations of one or more characteristics of the physical environment. For example, an AV park may have virtual trees and virtual buildings, but people with faces photorealistically reproduced from images taken of physical people. As another example, a virtual object may adopt a shape or color of a physical article imaged by one or more imaging sensors. As a further example, a virtual object may adopt shadows consistent with the position of the sun in the physical environment.

[0065] In an augmented reality, mixed reality, or virtual reality environment, a view of a three-dimensional environment is visible to a user. The view of the three-dimensional environment is typically visible to the user via one or more display generation components (e.g., a display or a pair of display modules that provide stereoscopic content to different eyes of the same user) through a virtual viewport that has a viewport boundary that defines an extent of the three-dimensional environment that is visible to the user via the one or more display generation components. In some embodiments, the region defined by the viewport boundary is smaller than a range of vision of the user in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the range of vision of the user, size, optical properties or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generation components, and / or the location and / or orientation of the one or more display generation components relative to the eyes of the user). In some embodiments, the region defined by the viewport boundary is larger than a range of vision of the user in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the range of vision of the user, size, optical properties or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generation components, and / or the location and / or orientation of the one or more display generation components relative to the eyes of the user). The viewport and viewport boundary typically move as the one or more display generation components move (e.g., moving with a head of the user for a head mounted device or moving with a hand of a user for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone). A viewpoint of a user determines what content is visible in the viewport, a viewpoint generally specfies a location and a direction relative to the three-dimensional environment, and as the viewpoint shifts, the view of the three-dimensional environment will also shift in the viewport. For a head mounted device, a viewpoint is typically based on a location and direction of the head, face, and / or eyes of a user to provide a view of the three-dimensional environment that is perceptually accurate and provides an immersive experience when the user is using the head-mounted device. For a handheld or stationed device, the viewpoint shifts as the handheld or stationed device is moved and / or as a position of a user relative to the handheld or stationed device changes (e.g., a user moving toward, away from, up, down, to the right, and / or to the left of the device). For devices that include display generation components with virtual passthrough, portions of the physical environment that are visible (e.g., displayed, and / or projected) via the one or more display generation components are based on a field of view of one or more cameras in communication with the display generation components which typically move with the display generation components (e.g., moving with a head of the user for a head mounted device or moving with a hand of a user for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone) because the viewpoint of the user moves as the field of view of the one or more cameras moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects displayed via the one or more display generation components is updated based on the viewpoint of the user (e.g., displayed positions and poses of the virtual objects are updated based on the movement of the viewpoint of the user)). For display generation components with optical passthrough, portions of the physical environment that are visible (e.g., optically visible through one or more partially or fully transparent portions of the display generation component) via the one or more display generation components are based on a field of view of a user through the partially or fully transparent portion(s) of the display generation component (e.g., moving with a head of the user for a head mounted device or moving with a hand of a user for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone) because the viewpoint of the user moves as the field of view of the user through the partially or fully transparent portions of the display generation components moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects is updated based on the viewpoint of the user).

[0066] In some embodiments a representation of a physical environment (e.g., displayed via virtual passthrough or optical passthrough) can be partially or fully obscured by a virtual environment. In some embodiments, the amount of virtual environment that is displayed (e.g., the amount of physical environment that is not displayed) is based on an immersion level for the virtual environment (e.g., with respect to the representation of the physical environment). For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment to be displayed, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment, and reducing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtualenvironment to be displayed, revealing portions of the physical environment that were previously not displayed and / or obscured. In some embodiments, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects (e.g., in the representation of the physical environment) are visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) more than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects cease to be displayed. In some embodiments, a level of immersion includes an associated degree to which the virtual content displayed by the computer system (e.g., the virtual environment and / or the virtual content) obscures background content (e.g., content other than the virtual environment and / or the virtual content) around / behind the virtual content, optionally including the number of items of background content displayed and / or the visual characteristics (e.g., colors, contrast, and / or opacity) with which the background content is displayed, the angular range of the virtual content displayed via the display generation component (e.g., 60 degrees of content displayed at low immersion, 120 degrees of content displayed at medium immersion, or 180 degrees of content displayed at high immersion), and / or the proportion of the field of view displayed via the display generation component that is consumed by the virtual content (e.g., 33% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at low immersion, 66% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at medium immersion, or 100% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at high immersion). In some embodiments, the background content is included in a background over which the virtual content is displayed (e.g., background content in the representation of the physical environment). In some embodiments, the background content includes user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces generated by the computer system corresponding to applications), virtual objects (e.g., files or representations of other users generated by the computer system) not associated with or included in the virtual environment and / or virtual content, and / or real objects (e.g., pass-through objects representing real objects in the physical environment around the user that are visible such that they are displayed via the display generation component and / or a visible via a transparent or translucent component of the display generation component because the computer system does not obscure / prevent visibility of them through the display generation component). In some embodiments, at a low level of immersion (e.g., a first level of immersion), the background, virtual and / or real objects are displayed in an unobscured manner. For example, a virtual environment with a low level of immersion is optionally displayed concurrently with the background content,which is optionally displayed with full brightness, color, and / or translucency. In some embodiments, at a higher level of immersion (e.g., a second level of immersion higher than the first level of immersion), the background, virtual and / or real objects are displayed in an obscured manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or removed from display). For example, a respective virtual environment with a high level of immersion is displayed without concurrently displaying the background content (e.g., in a full screen or fully immersive mode). As another example, a virtual environment displayed with a medium level of immersion is displayed concurrently with darkened, blurred, or otherwise de-emphasized background content. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of the background objects vary among the background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) more than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects cease to be displayed. In some embodiments, a null or zero level of immersion corresponds to the virtual environment ceasing to be displayed and instead a representation of a physical environment is displayed (optionally with one or more virtual objets such as application, windows, or virtual three- dimensional objects) without the representation of the physical environment being obscured by the virtual environment. Adjusting the level of immersion using a physical input element provides for quick and efficient method of adjusting immersion, which enhances the operability of the computer system and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

[0067] Viewpoint-locked virtual object: A virtual object is viewpoint-locked when a computer system displays the virtual object at the same location and / or position in the viewpoint of the user, even as the viewpoint of the user shifts (e.g., changes). In embodiments where the computer system is a head-mounted device, the viewpoint of the user is locked to the forward facing direction of the user’s head (e.g., the viewpoint of the user is at least a portion of the field-of-view of the user when the user is looking straight ahead); thus, the viewpoint of the user remains fixed even as the user’s gaze is shifted, without moving the user’s head. In embodiments where the computer system has a display generation component (e.g., a display screen) that can be repositioned with respect to the user’s head, the viewpoint of the user is the augmented reality view that is being presented to the user on a display generation component of the computer system. For example, a viewpoint-locked virtual object that is displayed in the upper left corner of the viewpoint of the user, when theviewpoint of the user is in a first orientation (e.g., with the user’s head facing north) continues to be displayed in the upper left comer of the viewpoint of the user, even as the viewpoint of the user changes to a second orientation (e.g., with the user’s head facing west). In other words, the location and / or position at which the viewpoint-locked virtual object is displayed in the viewpoint of the user is independent of the user’s position and / or orientation in the physical environment. In embodiments in which the computer system is a headmounted device, the viewpoint of the user is locked to the orientation of the user’s head, such that the virtual object is also referred to as a “head-locked virtual object.”

[0068] Environment-locked virtual object: A virtual object is environment-locked (alternatively, “world-locked”) when a computer system displays the virtual object at a location and / or position in the viewpoint of the user that is based on (e.g., selected in reference to and / or anchored to) a location and / or object in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., a physical environment or a virtual environment). As the viewpoint of the user shifts, the location and / or object in the environment relative to the viewpoint of the user changes, which results in the environment-locked virtual object being displayed at a different location and / or position in the viewpoint of the user. For example, an environment-locked virtual object that is locked onto a tree that is immediately in front of a user is displayed at the center of the viewpoint of the user. When the viewpoint of the user shifts to the right (e.g., the user’s head is turned to the right) so that the tree is now left-of-center in the viewpoint of the user (e.g., the tree’s position in the viewpoint of the user shifts), the environment-locked virtual object that is locked onto the tree is displayed left-of-center in the viewpoint of the user. In other words, the location and / or position at which the environment-locked virtual object is displayed in the viewpoint of the user is dependent on the position and / or orientation of the location and / or object in the environment onto which the virtual object is locked. In some embodiments, the computer system uses a stationary frame of reference (e.g., a coordinate system that is anchored to a fixed location and / or object in the physical environment) in order to determine the position at which to display an environment-locked virtual object in the viewpoint of the user. An environment-locked virtual object can be locked to a stationary part of the environment (e.g., a floor, wall, table, or other stationary object) or can be locked to a moveable part of the environment (e.g., a vehicle, animal, person, or even a representation of portion of the users body that moves independently of a viewpoint of the user, such as a user’s hand, wrist, arm, or foot) so that the virtual object ismoved as the viewpoint or the portion of the environment moves to maintain a fixed relationship between the virtual object and the portion of the environment.

[0069] In some embodiments a virtual object that is environment-locked or viewpoint-locked exhibits lazy follow behavior which reduces or delays motion of the environment-locked or viewpoint-locked virtual object relative to movement of a point of reference which the virtual object is following. In some embodiments, when exhibiting lazy follow behavior the computer system intentionally delays movement of the virtual object when detecting movement of a point of reference (e.g., a portion of the environment, the viewpoint, or a point that is fixed relative to the viewpoint, such as a point that is between 5- 300cm from the viewpoint) which the virtual object is following. For example, when the point of reference (e.g., the portion of the environement or the viewpoint) moves with a first speed, the virtual object is moved by the device to remain locked to the point of reference but moves with a second speed that is slower than the first speed (e.g., until the point of reference stops moving or slows down, at which point the virtual object starts to catch up to the point of reference). In some embodiments, when a virtual object exhibits lazy follow behavior the device ignores small amounts of movment of the point of reference (e.g., ignoring movement of the point of reference that is below a threshold amount of movement such as movement by 0-5 degrees or movement by 0-50 cm). For example, when the point of reference (e.g., the portion of the environment or the viewpoint to which the virtual object is locked) moves by a first amount, a distance between the point of reference and the virtual object increases (e.g., because the virtual object is being displayed so as to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to a viewpoint or portion of the environment that is different from the point of reference to which the virtual object is locked) and when the point of reference (e.g., the portion of the environment or the viewpoint to which the virtual object is locked) moves by a second amount that is greater than the first amount, a distance between the point of reference and the virtual object initially increases (e.g., because the virtual object is being displayed so as to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to a viewpoint or portion of the environment that is different from the point of reference to which the virtual object is locked) and then decreases as the amount of movement of the point of reference increases above a threshold (e.g., a “lazy follow” threshold) because the virtual object is moved by the computer system to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to the point of reference. In some embodiments the virtual object maintaining a substantially fixed positionrelative to the point of reference includes the virtual object being displayed within a threshold distance (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 5, 15, 20, 50 cm) of the point of reference in one or more dimensions (e.g., up / down, left / right, and / or forward / backward relative to the position of the point of reference).

[0070] Hardware: There are many different types of electronic systems that enable a person to sense and / or interact with various XR environments. Examples include headmounted systems, projection-based systems, heads-up displays (HUDs), vehicle windshields having integrated display capability, windows having integrated display capability, displays formed as lenses designed to be placed on a person’s eyes (e.g., similar to contact lenses), headphones / earphones, speaker arrays, input systems (e.g., wearable or handheld controllers with or without haptic feedback), smartphones, tablets, and desktop / laptop computers. A head-mounted system may have one or more speaker(s) and an integrated opaque display. Alternatively, a head-mounted system may be configured to accept an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone). The head-mounted system may incorporate one or more imaging sensors to capture images or video of the physical environment, and / or one or more microphones to capture audio of the physical environment. Rather than an opaque display, a head-mounted system may have a transparent or translucent display. The transparent or translucent display may have a medium through which light representative of images is directed to a person’s eyes. The display may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, uLEDs, liquid crystal on silicon, laser scanning light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a hologram medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, the transparent or translucent display may be configured to become opaque selectively.Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology that projects graphical images onto a person’s retina. Projection systems also may be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as a hologram or on a physical surface. In some embodiments, the controller 110 is configured to manage and coordinate an XR experience for the user. In some embodiments, the controller 110 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. The controller 110 is described in greater detail below with respect to Figure 2. In some embodiments, the controller 110 is a computing device that is local or remote relative to the scene 105 (e.g., a physical environment). For example, the controller 110 is a local server located within the scene 105.In another example, the controller 110 is a remote server located outside of the scene 105 (e.g., a cloud server, central server, etc.). In some embodiments, the controller 110 is communicatively coupled with the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD, a display, a projector, a touch-screen, etc.) via one or more wired or wireless communication channels 144 (e.g., BLUETOOTH, IEEE 802.1 lx, IEEE 802.16x, IEEE 802.3x, etc.). In another example, the controller 110 is included within the enclosure (e.g., a physical housing) of the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD, or a portable electronic device that includes a display and one or more processors, etc.), one or more of the input devices 125, one or more of the output devices 155, one or more of the sensors 190, and / or one or more of the peripheral devices 195, or share the same physical enclosure or support structure with one or more of the above.

[0071] In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 is configured to provide the XR experience (e.g., at least a visual component of the XR experience) to the user. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. The display generation component 120 is described in greater detail below with respect to Figure 3 A. In some embodiments, the functionalities of the controller 110 are provided by and / or combined with the display generation component 120.

[0072] According to some embodiments, the display generation component 120 provides an XR experience to the user while the user is virtually and / or physically present within the scene 105.

[0073] In some embodiments, the display generation component is worn on a part of the user’s body (e.g., on his / her head, on his / her hand, etc.). As such, the display generation component 120 includes one or more XR displays provided to display the XR content. For example, in various embodiments, the display generation component 120 encloses the field- of-view of the user. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 is a handheld device (such as a smartphone or tablet) configured to present XR content, and the user holds the device with a display directed towards the field-of-view of the user and a camera directed towards the scene 105. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally placed within an enclosure that is worn on the head of the user. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally placed on a support (e.g., a tripod) in front of the user. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 is an XR chamber,enclosure, or room configured to present XR content in which the user does not wear or hold the display generation component 120. Many user interfaces described with reference to one type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., a handheld device or a device on a tripod) could be implemented on another type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., an HMD or other wearable computing device). For example, a user interface showing interactions with XR content triggered based on interactions that happen in a space in front of a handheld or tripod mounted device could similarly be implemented with an HMD where the interactions happen in a space in front of the HMD and the responses of the XR content are displayed via the HMD. Similarly, a user interface showing interactions with XR content triggered based on movement of a handheld or tripod mounted device relative to the physical environment (e.g., the scene 105 or a part of the user’s body (e.g., the user’s eye(s), head, or hand)) could similarly be implemented with an HMD where the movement is caused by movement of the HMD relative to the physical environment (e.g., the scene 105 or a part of the user’s body (e.g., the user’s eye(s), head, or hand)).

[0074] While pertinent features of the operating environment 100 are shown in Figure 1 A, those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate from the present disclosure that various other features have not been illustrated for the sake of brevity and so as not to obscure more pertinent aspects of the example embodiments disclosed herein.

[0075] Figures 1 A-1P illustrate various examples of a computer system that is used to perform the methods and provide audio, visual and / or haptic feedback as part of user interfaces described herein. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more display generation components (e.g., first and second display assemblies l-120a, l-120b and / or first and second optical modules 11.1. l-104a and 11.1. l-104b) for displaying virtual elements and / or a representation of a physical environment to a user of the computer system, optionally generated based on detected events and / or user inputs detected by the computer system. User interfaces generated by the computer system are optionally corrected by one or more corrective lenses 11.3.2-216 that are optionally removably attached to one or more of the optical modules to enable the user interfaces to be more easily viewed by users who would otherwise use glasses or contacts to correct their vision. While many user interfaces illustrated herein show a single view of a user interface, user interfaces in a HMD are optionally displayed using two optical modules (e.g., first and second display assemblies 1- 120a, l-120b and / or first and second optical modules l l.l. l-104a and 11.1.1-104b), one for auser’s right eye and a different one for a user’s left eye, and slightly different images are presented to the two different eyes to generate the illusion of stereoscopic depth, the single view of the user interface would typically be either a right-eye or left-eye view and the depth effect is explained in the text or using other schematic charts or views. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more external displays (e.g., display assembly 1-108) for displaying status information for the computer system to the user of the computer system (when the computer system is not being worn) and / or to other people who are near the computer system, optionally generated based on detected events and / or user inputs detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more audio output components (e.g., electronic component 1-112) for generating audio feedback, optionally generated based on detected events and / or user inputs detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input such as one or more sensors (e.g., one or more sensors in sensor assembly 1- 356, and / or Figure II) for detecting information about a physical environment of the device which can be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators such as the illuminators described in Figure II) to generate a digital passthrough image, capture visual media corresponding to the physical environment (e.g., photos and / or video), or determine a pose (e.g., position and / or orientation) of physical objects and / or surfaces in the physical environment so that virtual objects ban be placed based on a detected pose of physical objects and / or surfaces. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input such as one or more sensors for detecting hand position and / or movement (e.g., one or more sensors in sensor assembly 1-356, and / or Figure II) that can be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators such as the illuminators 6-124 described in Figure II) to determine when one or more air gestures have been performed. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input such as one or more sensors for detecting eye movement (e.g., eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors in Figure II) which can be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more lights such as lights 11.3.2-110 in Figure 10) to determine attention or gaze position and / or gaze movement which can optionally be used to detect gaze-only inputs based on gaze movement and / or dwell. A combination of the various sensors described above can be used to determine user facial expressions and / or hand movements for use in generating an avatar or representation of the user such as an anthropomorphic avatar or representation for use in areal-time communication session where the avatar has facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements that are based on or similar to detected facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements of a user of the device. Gaze and / or attention information is, optionally, combined with hand tracking information to determine interactions between the user and one or more user interfaces based on direct and / or indirect inputs such as air gestures or inputs that use one or more hardware input devices such as one or more buttons (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, second button 1-132, and or dial or button 1-328), knobs (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, and / or dial or button 1-328), digital crowns (e.g., first button 1-128 which is depressible and twistable or rotatable, button 11.1.1- 114, and / or dial or button 1-328), trackpads, touch screens, keyboards, mice and / or other input devices. One or more buttons (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, second button 1-132, and or dial or button 1-328) are optionally used to perform system operations such as recentering content in three-dimensional environment that is visible to a user of the device, displaying a home user interface for launching applications, starting real-time communication sessions, or initiating display of virtual three-dimensional backgrounds. Knobs or digital crowns (e.g., first button 1-128 which is depressible and twistable or rotatable, button 11.1.1- 114, and / or dial or button 1-328) are optionally rotatable to adjust parameters of the visual content such as a level of immersion of a virtual three-dimensional environment (e.g., a degree to which virtual-content occupies the viewport of the user into the three-dimensional environment) or other parameters associated with the three-dimensional environment and the virtual content that is displayed via the optical modules (e.g., first and second display assemblies l-120a, l-120b and / or first and second optical modules l l. l.l-104a and 11.1.1- 104b).

[0076] FIG. IB illustrates a front, top, perspective view of an example of a head- mountable display (HMD) device 1-100 configured to be donned by a user and provide virtual and altered / mixed reality (VR / AR) experiences. The HMD 1-100 can include a display unit 1-102 or assembly, an electronic strap assembly 1-104 connected to and extending from the display unit 1-102, and a band assembly 1-106 secured at either end to the electronic strap assembly 1-104. The electronic strap assembly 1-104 and the band 1-106 can be part of a retention assembly configured to wrap around a user’s head to hold the display unit 1-102 against the face of the user.

[0077] In at least one example, the band assembly 1-106 can include a first band 1- 116 configured to wrap around the rear side of a user’s head and a second band 1-117 configured to extend over the top of a user’s head. The second strap can extend between first and second electronic straps l-105a, 1 -105b of the electronic strap assembly 1-104 as shown. The strap assembly 1-104 and the band assembly 1-106 can be part of a securement mechanism extending rearward from the display unit 1-102 and configured to hold the display unit 1-102 against a face of a user.

[0078] In at least one example, the securement mechanism includes a first electronic strap l-105a including a first proximal end 1-134 coupled to the display unit 1-102, for example a housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102, and a first distal end 1-136 opposite the first proximal end 1-134. The securement mechanism can also include a second electronic strap 1 -105b including a second proximal end 1-138 coupled to the housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102 and a second distal end 1-140 opposite the second proximal end 1-138. The securement mechanism can also include the first band 1-116 including a first end 1-142 coupled to the first distal end 1-136 and a second end 1-144 coupled to the second distal end 1-140 and the second band 1-117 extending between the first electronic strap l-105a and the second electronic strap 1 - 105b . The straps l-105a-b and band 1-116 can be coupled via connection mechanisms or assemblies 1-114. In at least one example, the second band 1-117 includes a first end 1-146 coupled to the first electronic strap l-105a between the first proximal end 1-134 and the first distal end 1-136 and a second end 1-148 coupled to the second electronic strap 1-105b between the second proximal end 1-138 and the second distal end 1-140.

[0079] In at least one example, the first and second electronic straps l-105a-b include plastic, metal, or other structural materials forming the shape the substantially rigid straps 1- 105a-b. In at least one example, the first and second bands 1-116, 1-117 are formed of elastic, flexible materials including woven textiles, rubbers, and the like. The first and second bands 1-116, 1-117 can be flexible to conform to the shape of the user’ head when donning the HMD 1-100.

[0080] In at least one example, one or more of the first and second electronic straps 1- 105a-b can define internal strap volumes and include one or more electronic components disposed in the internal strap volumes. In one example, as shown in FIG. IB, the firstelectronic strap l-105a can include an electronic component 1-112. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a speaker. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a computing component such as a processor.

[0081] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 defines a first, front-facing opening 1-152. The front-facing opening is labeled in dotted lines at 1-152 in FIG. IB because the display assembly 1-108 is disposed to occlude the first opening 1-152 from view when the HMD 1-100 is assembled. The housing 1-150 can also define a rear-facing second opening 1- 154. The housing 1-150 also defines an internal volume between the first and second openings 1-152, 1-154. In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 includes the display assembly 1-108, which can include a front cover and display screen (shown in other figures) disposed in or across the front opening 1-152 to occlude the front opening 1-152. In at least one example, the display screen of the display assembly 1-108, as well as the display assembly 1-108 in general, has a curvature configured to follow the curvature of a user’s face. The display screen of the display assembly 1-108 can be curved as shown to compliment the user’s facial features and general curvature from one side of the face to the other, for example from left to right and / or from top to bottom where the display unit 1-102 is pressed.

[0082] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 can define a first aperture 1-126 between the first and second openings 1-152, 1-154 and a second aperture 1-130 between the first and second openings 1-152, 1-154. The HMD 1-100 can also include a first button 1-128 disposed in the first aperture 1-126 and a second button 1-132 disposed in the second aperture 1-130. The first and second buttons 1-128, 1-132 can be depressible through the respective apertures 1-126, 1-130. In at least one example, the first button 1-126 and / or second button 1- 132 can be twistable dials as well as depressible buttons. In at least one example, the first button 1-128 is a depressible and twistable dial button and the second button 1-132 is a depressible button.

[0083] FIG. 1C illustrates a rear, perspective view of the HMD 1-100. The HMD 1- 100 can include a light seal 1-110 extending rearward from the housing 1-150 of the display assembly 1-108 around a perimeter of the housing 1-150 as shown. The light seal 1-110 can be configured to extend from the housing 1-150 to the user’s face around the user’s eyes to block external light from being visible. In one example, the HMD 1-100 can include first andsecond display assemblies l-120a, l-120b disposed at or in the rearward facing second opening 1-154 defined by the housing 1-150 and / or disposed in the internal volume of the housing 1-150 and configured to project light through the second opening 1-154. In at least one example, each display assembly l-120a-b can include respective display screens l-122a, l-122b configured to project light in a rearward direction through the second opening 1-154 toward the user’s eyes.

[0084] In at least one example, referring to both FIGS. IB and 1C, the display assembly 1-108 can be a front-facing, forward display assembly including a display screen configured to project light in a first, forward direction and the rear facing display screens 1- 122a-b can be configured to project light in a second, rearward direction opposite the first direction. As noted above, the light seal 1-110 can be configured to block light external to the HMD 1-100 from reaching the user’s eyes, including light projected by the forward facing display screen of the display assembly 1-108 shown in the front perspective view of FIG. IB. In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 can also include a curtain 1-124 occluding the second opening 1-154 between the housing 1-150 and the rear-facing display assemblies 1- 120a-b. In at least one example, the curtain 1-124 can be elastic or at least partially elastic.

[0085] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIGS. IB and 1C can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. ID - IF and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. ID - IF can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. IB and 1C.

[0086] FIG. ID illustrates an exploded view of an example of an HMD 1-200 including various portions or parts thereof separated according to the modularity and selective coupling of those parts. For example, the HMD 1-200 can include a band 1-216 which can be selectively coupled to first and second electronic straps l-205a, l-205b. The first securement strap l-205a can include a first electronic component l-212a and the second securement strap l-205b can include a second electronic component 1-212b. In at least one example, the first and second straps l-205a-b can be removably coupled to the display unit 1- 202.

[0087] In addition, the HMD 1-200 can include a light seal 1-210 configured to be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202. The HMD 1-200 can also include lenses 1-218 which can be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202, for example over first and second display assemblies including display screens. The lenses 1-218 can include customized prescription lenses configured for corrective vision. As noted, each part shown in the exploded view of FIG. ID and described above can be removably coupled, attached, reattached, and changed out to update parts or swap out parts for different users. For example, bands such as the band 1-216, light seals such as the light seal 1-210, lenses such as the lenses 1-218, and electronic straps such as the straps l-205a-b can be swapped out depending on the user such that these parts are customized to fit and correspond to the individual user of the HMD 1-200.

[0088] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. ID can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. IB, 1C, and IE - IF and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. IB, 1C, and IE - IF can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. ID.

[0089] FIG. IE illustrates an exploded view of an example of a display unit 1-306 of a HMD. The display unit 1-306 can include a front display assembly 1-308, a frame / housing assembly 1-350, and a curtain assembly 1-324. The display unit 1-306 can also include a sensor assembly 1-356, logic board assembly 1-358, and cooling assembly 1-360 disposed between the frame assembly 1-350 and the front display assembly 1-308. In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 can also include a rear-facing display assembly 1-320 including first and second rear-facing display screens l-322a, 1-322b disposed between the frame 1-350 and the curtain assembly 1-324.

[0090] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 can also include a motor assembly 1-362 configured as an adjustment mechanism for adjusting the positions of the display screens l-322a-b of the display assembly 1-320 relative to the frame 1-350. In at least one example, the display assembly 1-320 is mechanically coupled to the motor assembly 1-362, with at least one motor for each display screen l-322a-b, such that the motors can translate the display screens l-322a-b to match an interpupillary distance of the user’s eyes.

[0091] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 can include a dial or button 1- 328 depressible relative to the frame 1-350 and accessible to the user outside the frame 1-350. The button 1-328 can be electronically connected to the motor assembly 1-362 via a controller such that the button 1-328 can be manipulated by the user to cause the motors of the motor assembly 1-362 to adjust the positions of the display screens l-322a-b.

[0092] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IE can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. IB - ID and IF and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. IB - ID and IF can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IE.

[0093] FIG. IF illustrates an exploded view of another example of a display unit 1- 406 of a HMD device similar to other HMD devices described herein. The display unit 1-406 can include a front display assembly 1-402, a sensor assembly 1-456, a logic board assembly 1-458, a cooling assembly 1-460, a frame assembly 1-450, a rear-facing display assembly 1- 421, and a curtain assembly 1-424. The display unit 1-406 can also include a motor assembly 1-462 for adjusting the positions of first and second display sub-assemblies l-420a, l-420b of the rear-facing display assembly 1-421, including first and second respective display screens for interpupillary adjustments, as described above.

[0094] The various parts, systems, and assemblies shown in the exploded view of FIG. IF are described in greater detail herein with reference to FIGS. IB - IE as well as subsequent figures referenced in the present disclosure. The display unit 1-406 shown in FIG. IF can be assembled and integrated with the securement mechanisms shown in FIGS. IB - IE, including the electronic straps, bands, and other components including light seals, connection assemblies, and so forth.

[0095] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IF can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. IB -IE and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. IB - IE can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IF.

[0096] Figure 1G illustrates a perspective, exploded view of a front cover assembly 3- 100 of an HMD device described herein, for example the front cover assembly 3-1 of the HMD 3-100 shown in FIG. 1G or any other HMD device shown and described herein. The front cover assembly 3-100 shown in FIG. 1G can include a transparent or semi-transparent cover 3-102, shroud 3-104 (or “canopy”), adhesive layers 3-106, display assembly 3-108 including a lenticular lens panel or array 3-110, and a structural trim 3-112. The adhesive layer 3-106 can secure the shroud 3-104 and / or transparent cover 3-102 to the display assembly 3-108 and / or the trim 3-112. The trim 3-112 can secure the various components of the front cover assembly 3-100 to a frame or chassis of the HMD device.

[0097] In at least one example, as shown in FIG. 1G, the transparent cover 3-102, shroud 3-104, and display assembly 3-108, including the lenticular lens array 3-110, can be curved to accommodate the curvature of a user’s face. The transparent cover 3-102 and the shroud 3-104 can be curved in two or three dimensions, e.g., vertically curved in the Z- direction in and out of the Z-X plane and horizontally curved in the X-direction in and out of the Z-X plane. In at least one example, the display assembly 3-108 can include the lenticular lens array 3-110 as well as a display panel having pixels configured to project light through the shroud 3-104 and the transparent cover 3-102. The display assembly 3-108 can be curved in at least one direction, for example the horizontal direction, to accommodate the curvature of a user’s face from one side (e.g., left side) of the face to the other (e.g., right side). In at least one example, each layer or component of the display assembly 3-108, which will be shown in subsequent figures and described in more detail, but which can include the lenticular lens array 3-110 and a display layer, can be similarly or concentrically curved in the horizontal direction to accommodate the curvature of the user’s face.

[0098] In at least one example, the shroud 3-104 can include a transparent or semitransparent material through which the display assembly 3-108 projects light. In one example, the shroud 3-104 can include one or more opaque portions, for example opaque ink-printed portions or other opaque film portions on the rear surface of the shroud 3-104. The rearsurface can be the surface of the shroud 3-104 facing the user’s eyes when the HMD device is donned. In at least one example, opaque portions can be on the front surface of the shroud 3- 104 opposite the rear surface. In at least one example, the opaque portion or portions of the shroud 3-104 can include perimeter portions visually hiding any components around an outside perimeter of the display screen of the display assembly 3-108. In this way, the opaque portions of the shroud hide any other components, including electronic components, structural components, and so forth, of the HMD device that would otherwise be visible through the transparent or semi-transparent cover 3-102 and / or shroud 3-104.

[0099] In at least one example, the shroud 3-104 can define one or more apertures transparent portions 3-120 through which sensors can send and receive signals. In one example, the portions 3-120 are apertures through which the sensors can extend or send and receive signals. In one example, the portions 3-120 are transparent portions, or portions more transparent than surrounding semi-transparent or opaque portions of the shroud, through which sensors can send and receive signals through the shroud and through the transparent cover 3-102. In one example, the sensors can include cameras, IR sensors, LUX sensors, or any other visual or non-visual environmental sensors of the HMD device.

[0100] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. 1G can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described herein can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. 1G.

[0101] FIG. 1H illustrates an exploded view of an example of an HMD device 6-100. The HMD device 6-100 can include a sensor array or system 6-102 including one or more sensors, cameras, projectors, and so forth mounted to one or more components of the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a bracket 1-338 on which one or more sensors of the sensor system 6-102 can be fixed / secured.

[0102] FIG. II illustrates a portion of an HMD device 6-100 including a front transparent cover 6-104 and a sensor system 6-102. The sensor system 6-102 can include a number of different sensors, emitters, receivers, including cameras, IR sensors, projectors,and so forth. The transparent cover 6-104 is illustrated in front of the sensor system 6-102 to illustrate relative positions of the various sensors and emitters as well as the orientation of each sensor / emitter of the system 6-102. As referenced herein, “sideways,” “side,” “lateral,” “horizontal,” and other similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the X- axis shown in FIG. 1 J. Terms such as “vertical,” “up,” “down,” and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Z-axis shown in FIG. 1 J. Terms such as “frontward,” “rearward,” “forward,” backward,” and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Y-axis shown in FIG. 1 J.

[0103] In at least one example, the transparent cover 6-104 can define a front, external surface of the HMD device 6-100 and the sensor system 6-102, including the various sensors and components thereof, can be disposed behind the cover 6-104 in the Y- axis / direction. The cover 6-104 can be transparent or semi-transparent to allow light to pass through the cover 6-104, both light detected by the sensor system 6-102 and light emitted thereby.

[0104] As noted elsewhere herein, the HMD device 6-100 can include one or more controllers including processors for electrically coupling the various sensors and emitters of the sensor system 6-102 with one or more mother boards, processing units, and other electronic devices such as display screens and the like. In addition, as will be shown in more detail below with reference to other figures, the various sensors, emitters, and other components of the sensor system 6-102 can be coupled to various structural frame members, brackets, and so forth of the HMD device 6-100 not shown in FIG. II. FIG. II shows the components of the sensor system 6-102 unattached and un-coupled electrically from other components for the sake of illustrative clarity.

[0105] In at least one example, the device can include one or more controllers having processors configured to execute instructions stored on memory components electrically coupled to the processors. The instructions can include, or cause the processor to execute, one or more algorithms for self-correcting angles and positions of the various cameras described herein overtime with use as the initial positions, angles, or orientations of the cameras get bumped or deformed due to unintended drop events or other events.

[0106] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include one or more scene cameras 6-106. The system 6-102 can include two scene cameras 6-102 disposed oneither side of the nasal bridge or arch of the HMD device 6-100 such that each of the two cameras 6-106 correspond generally in position with left and right eyes of the user behind the cover 6-103. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-106 are oriented generally forward in the Y-direction to capture images in front of the user during use of the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the scene cameras are color cameras and provide images and content for MR video pass through to the display screens facing the user’s eyes when using the HMD device 6-100. The scene cameras 6-106 can also be used for environment and object reconstruction.

[0107] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a first depth sensor 6-108 pointed generally forward in the Y-direction. In at least one example, the first depth sensor 6-108 can be used for environment and object reconstruction as well as user hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a second depth sensor 6-110 disposed centrally along the width (e.g., along the X-axis) of the HMD device 6-100. For example, the second depth sensor 6-110 can be disposed above the central nasal bridge or accommodating features over the nose of the user when donning the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the second depth sensor 6-110 can be used for environment and object reconstruction as well as hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the second depth sensor can include a LIDAR sensor.

[0108] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a depth projector 6-112 facing generally forward to project electromagnetic waves, for example in the form of a predetermined pattern of light dots, out into and within a field of view of the user and / or the scene cameras 6-106 or a field of view including and beyond the field of view of the user and / or scene cameras 6-106. In at least one example, the depth projector can project electromagnetic waves of light in the form of a dotted light pattern to be reflected off objects and back into the depth sensors noted above, including the depth sensors 6-108, 6-110. In at least one example, the depth projector 6-112 can be used for environment and object reconstruction as well as hand and body tracking.

[0109] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include downward facing cameras 6-114 with a field of view pointed generally downward relative to the HMD device 6-100 in the Z-axis. In at least one example, the downward cameras 6-114 can be disposed on left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and used for hand and body tracking,headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation for display a user avatar on the forward facing display screen of the HMD device 6-100 described elsewhere herein. The downward cameras 6-114, for example, can be used to capture facial expressions and movements for the face of the user below the HMD device 6-100, including the cheeks, mouth, and chin.

[0110] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include jaw cameras 6- 116. In at least one example, the jaw cameras 6-116 can be disposed on left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation for display a user avatar on the forward facing display screen of the HMD device 6-100 described elsewhere herein. The jaw cameras 6-116, for example, can be used to capture facial expressions and movements for the face of the user below the HMD device 6-100, including the user’s jaw, cheeks, mouth, and chin.

[0111] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include side cameras 6- 118. The side cameras 6-118 can be oriented to capture side views left and right in the X-axis or direction relative to the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the side cameras 6- 118 can be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and re-creation.

[0112] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a plurality of eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors for determining an identity, status, and gaze direction of a user’s eyes during and / or before use. In at least one example, the eye / gaze tracking sensors can include nasal eye cameras 6-120 disposed on either side of the user’s nose and adjacent the user’s nose when donning the HMD device 6-100. The eye / gaze sensors can also include bottom eye cameras 6-122 disposed below respective user eyes for capturing images of the eyes for facial avatar detection and creation, gaze tracking, and iris identification functions.

[0113] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include infrared illuminators 6-124 pointed outward from the HMD device 6-100 to illuminate the external environment and any object therein with IR light for IR detection with one or more IR sensors of the sensor system 6-102. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a flicker sensor 6-126 and an ambient light sensor 6-128. In at least one example, the flicker sensor 6-126 can detect overhead light refresh rates to avoid display flicker. In one example, the infrared illuminators 6-124 can include light emitting diodes and can be usedespecially for low light environments for illuminating user hands and other objects in low light for detection by infrared sensors of the sensor system 6-102.

[0114] In at least one example, multiple sensors, including the scene cameras 6-106, the downward cameras 6-114, the jaw cameras 6-116, the side cameras 6-118, the depth projector 6-112, and the depth sensors 6-108, 6-110 can be used in combination with an electrically coupled controller to combine depth data with camera data for hand tracking and for size determination for better hand tracking and object recognition and tracking functions of the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the downward cameras 6-114, jaw cameras 6-116, and side cameras 6-118 described above and shown in FIG. II can be wide angle cameras operable in the visible and infrared spectrums. In at least one example, these cameras 6-114, 6-116, 6-118 can operate only in black and white light detection to simplify image processing and gain sensitivity.

[0115] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. II can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. 1 J - IL and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. 1 J - IL can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. II.

[0116] FIG. 1 J illustrates a lower perspective view of an example of an HMD 6-200 including a cover or shroud 6-204 secured to a frame 6-230. In at least one example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 can be disposed around a perimeter of the HMD 6- 200 such that the sensors 6-203 are outwardly disposed around a perimeter of a display region or area 6-232 so as not to obstruct a view of the displayed light. In at least one example, the sensors can be disposed behind the shroud 6-204 and aligned with transparent portions of the shroud allowing sensors and projectors to allow light back and forth through the shroud 6-204. In at least one example, opaque ink or other opaque material or films / layers can be disposed on the shroud 6-204 around the display area 6-232 to hide components of the HMD 6-200 outside the display area 6-232 other than the transparent portions defined by the opaque portions, through which the sensors and projectors send and receive light and electromagnetic signals during operation. In at least one example, the shroud 6-204 allowslight to pass therethrough from the display (e.g., within the display region 6-232) but not radially outward from the display region around the perimeter of the display and shroud 6- 204.

[0117] In some examples, the shroud 6-204 includes a transparent portion 6-205 and an opaque portion 6-207, as described above and elsewhere herein. In at least one example, the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204 can define one or more transparent regions 6- 209 through which the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 can send and receive signals. In the illustrated example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 sending and receiving signals through the shroud 6-204, or more specifically through the transparent regions 6-209 of the (or defined by) the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204 can include the same or similar sensors as those shown in the example of FIG. II, for example depth sensors 6-108 and 6-110, depth projector 6-112, first and second scene cameras 6-106, first and second downward cameras 6-114, first and second side cameras 6-118, and first and second infrared illuminators 6-124. These sensors are also shown in the examples of FIGS. IK and IL. Other sensors, sensor types, number of sensors, and relative positions thereof can be included in one or more other examples of HMDs.

[0118] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. 1 J can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. II and IK - IL and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. II and IK - IL can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. 1 J.

[0119] FIG. IK illustrates a front view of a portion of an example of an HMD device 6-300 including a display 6-334, brackets 6-336, 6-338, and frame or housing 6-330. The example shown in FIG. IK does not include a front cover or shroud in order to illustrate the brackets 6-336, 6-338. For example, the shroud 6-204 shown in FIG. 1J includes the opaque portion 6-207 that would visually cover / block a view of anything outside (e.g., radially / peripherally outside) the display / display region 6-334, including the sensors 6-303 and bracket 6-338.

[0120] In at least one example, the various sensors of the sensor system 6-302 are coupled to the brackets 6-336, 6-338. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-306 include tight tolerances of angles relative to one another. For example, the tolerance of mounting angles between the two scene cameras 6-306 can be 0.5 degrees or less, for example 0.3 degrees or less. In order to achieve and maintain such a tight tolerance, in one example, the scene cameras 6-306 can be mounted to the bracket 6-338 and not the shroud. The bracket can include cantilevered arms on which the scene cameras 6-306 and other sensors of the sensor system 6-302 can be mounted to remain un-deformed in position and orientation in the case of a drop event by a user resulting in any deformation of the other bracket 6-226, housing 6-330, and / or shroud.

[0121] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IK can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. II - 1 J and IL and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. II - 1 J and IL can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IK.

[0122] FIG. IL illustrates a bottom view of an example of an HMD 6-400 including a front display / cover assembly 6-404 and a sensor system 6-402. The sensor system 6-402 can be similar to other sensor systems described above and elsewhere herein, including in reference to FIGS. II - IK. In at least one example, the jaw cameras 6-416 can be facing downward to capture images of the user’s lower facial features. In one example, the jaw cameras 6-416 can be coupled directly to the frame or housing 6-430 or one or more internal brackets directly coupled to the frame or housing 6-430 shown. The frame or housing 6-430 can include one or more apertures / openings 6-415 through which the jaw cameras 6-416 can send and receive signals.

[0123] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IL can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. II - IK and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. II- IK can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IL.

[0124] FIG. IM illustrates a rear perspective view of an inter-pupillary distance (IPD) adjustment system 11.1.1-102 including first and second optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b slidably engaging / coupled to respective guide-rods 11.1. l-108a-b and motors 11.1.1-1 lOa-b of left and right adjustment subsystems 11.1. l-106a-b. The IPD adjustment system 11.1.1- 102 can be coupled to a bracket 11.1.1-112 and include a button 11.1.1-114 in electrical communication with the motors 11.1.1-1 lOa-b. In at least one example, the button 11.1.1-114 can electrically communicate with the first and second motors 11.1.1-1 lOa-b via a processor or other circuitry components to cause the first and second motors 11.1.1-1 lOa-b to activate and cause the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b, respectively, to change position relative to one another.

[0125] In at least one example, the first and second optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b can include respective display screens configured to project light toward the user’s eyes when donning the HMD 11.1.1-100. In at least one example, the user can manipulate (e.g., depress and / or rotate) the button 11.1.1-114 to activate a positional adjustment of the optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b to match the inter-pupillary distance of the user’s eyes. The optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b can also include one or more cameras or other sensors / sensor systems for imaging and measuring the IPD of the user such that the optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b can be adjusted to match the IPD.

[0126] In one example, the user can manipulate the button 11.1.1-114 to cause an automatic positional adjustment of the first and second optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b. In one example, the user can manipulate the button 11.1.1-114 to cause a manual adjustment such that the optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b move further or closer away, for example when the user rotates the button 11.1.1-114 one way or the other, until the user visually matches her / his own IPD. In one example, the manual adjustment is electronically communicated via one or more circuits and power for the movements of the optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b via the motors 11.1.1-1 lOa-b is provided by an electrical power source. In one example, the adjustment and movement of the optical modules 11.1. l-104a-b via a manipulation of the button 11.1.1-114 is mechanically actuated via the movement of the button 11.1.1-114.

[0127] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IM can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in any other figures shown and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to any other figure shown and described herein, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IM.

[0128] FIG. IN illustrates a front perspective view of a portion of an HMD 11.1.2- 100, including an outer structural frame 11.1.2-102 and an inner or intermediate structural frame 11.1.2-104 defining first and second apertures 11.1.2- 106a, 11.1.2- 106b. The apertures11.1.2-106a-b are shown in dotted lines in FIG. IN because a view of the apertures 11.1.2- 106a-b can be blocked by one or more other components of the HMD 11.1.2-100 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 and / or the outer frame 11.1.2-102, as shown. In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 can include a first mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 between the first and second apertures 11.1 ,2-106a-b.

[0129] The mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can include a middle or central portion11.1.2-109 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104. In some examples, the middle or central portion 11.1.2-109 may not be the geometric middle or center of the bracket 11.1.2-108. Rather, the middle / central portion 11.1.2-109 can be disposed between first and second cantilevered extension arms extending away from the middle portion 11.1.2-109. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 108 includes a first cantilever arm 11.1.2-112 and a second cantilever arm 11.1.2-114 extending away from the middle portion 11.1.2-109 of the mount bracket 11.1.2-108 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104.

[0130] As shown in FIG. IN, the outer frame 11.1.2-102 can define a curved geometry on a lower side thereof to accommodate a user’s nose when the user dons the HMD11.1.2-100. The curved geometry can be referred to as a nose bridge 11.1.2-111 and be centrally located on a lower side of the HMD 11.1.2-100 as shown. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can be connected to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 between the apertures 11.1 ,2-106a-b such that the cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 extend downward and laterally outward away from the middle portion 11.1.2-109 to compliment thenose bridge 11.1.2-111 geometry of the outer frame 11.1.2-102. In this way, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is configured to accommodate the user’s nose as noted above. The nose bridge 11.1.2-111 geometry accommodates the nose in that the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 provides a curvature that curves with, above, over, and around the user’s nose for comfort and fit.

[0131] The first cantilever arm 11.1.2-112 can extend away from the middle portion11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 in a first direction and the second cantilever arm 11.1.2-114 can extend away from the middle portion 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket11.1.2-10 in a second direction opposite the first direction. The first and second cantilever arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 are referred to as “cantilevered” or “cantilever” arms because each arm 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114, includes a distal free end 11.1.2-116, 11.1.2-118, respectively, which are free of affixation from the inner and outer frames 11.1.2-102, 11.1.2- 104. In this way, the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 are cantilevered from the middle portion11.1.2-109, which can be connected to the inner frame 11.1.2-104, with distal ends 11.1.2- 102, 11.1.2-104 unattached.

[0132] In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 can include one or more components coupled to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108. In one example, the components include a plurality of sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f. Each sensor of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2- 1 lOa-f can include various types of sensors, including cameras, IR sensors, and so forth. In some examples, one or more of the sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f can be used for object recognition in three-dimensional space such that it is important to maintain a precise relative position of two or more of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f. The cantilevered nature of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can protect the sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f from damage and altered positioning in the case of accidental drops by the user. Because the sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f are cantilevered on the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108, stresses and deformations of the inner and / or outer frames 11.1.2-104, 11.1.2-102 are not transferred to the cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 and thus do not affect the relative positioning of the sensors 11.1.2-1 lOa-f coupled / mounted to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108.

[0133] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IN can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and described herein.Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described herein can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IN.

[0134] FIG. 10 illustrates an example of an optical module 11.3.2-100 for use in an electronic device such as an HMD, including HMD devices described herein. As shown in one or more other examples described herein, the optical module 11.3.2-100 can be one of two optical modules within an HMD, with each optical module aligned to project light toward a user’s eye. In this way, a first optical module can project light via a display screen toward a user’s first eye and a second optical module of the same device can project light via another display screen toward the user’s second eye.

[0135] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 can include an optical frame or housing 11.3.2-102, which can also be referred to as a barrel or optical module barrel. The optical module 11.3.2-100 can also include a display 11.3.2-104, including a display screen or multiple display screens, coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102. The display11.3.2-104 can be coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102 such that the display 11.3.2-104 is configured to project light toward the eye of a user when the HMD of which the display module 11.3.2-100 is a part is donned during use. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2- 102 can surround the display 11.3.2-104 and provide connection features for coupling other components of optical modules described herein.

[0136] In one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 can include one or more cameras 11.3.2-106 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102. The camera 11.3.2-106 can be positioned relative to the display 11.3.2-104 and housing 11.3.2-102 such that the camera11.3.2-106 is configured to capture one or more images of the user’s eye during use. In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 can also include a light strip 11.3.2-108 surrounding the display 11.3.2-104. In one example, the light strip 11.3.2-108 is disposed between the display 11.3.2-104 and the camera 11.3.2-106. The light strip 11.3.2-108 can include a plurality of lights 11.3.2- 110. The plurality of lights can include one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs) or other lights configured to project light toward the user’s eye when the HMD is donned. The individual lights 11.3.2-110 of the light strip 11.3.2-108 can bespaced about the strip 11.3.2-108 and thus spaced about the display 11.3.2-104 uniformly or non-uniformly at various locations on the strip 11.3.2-108 and around the display 11.3.2-104.

[0137] In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-102 defines a viewing opening11.3.2-101 through which the user can view the display 11.3.2-104 when the HMD device is donned. In at least one example, the LEDs are configured and arranged to emit light through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101 and onto the user’s eye. In one example, the camera 11.3.2- 106 is configured to capture one or more images of the user’s eye through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101.

[0138] As noted above, each of the components and features of the optical module11.3.2-100 shown in FIG. 10 can be replicated in another (e.g., second) optical module disposed with the HMD to interact (e.g., project light and capture images) of another eye of the user.

[0139] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. 10 can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIGS. IP or otherwise described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described with reference to FIGS. IP or otherwise described herein can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. 10.

[0140] FIG. IP illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example of an optical module11.3.2-200 including a housing 11.3.2-202, display assembly 11.3.2-204 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202, and a lens 11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-202 defines a first aperture or channel 11.3.2-212 and a second aperture or channel 11.3.2-214. The channels 11.3.2-212, 11.3.2-214 can be configured to slidably engage respective rails or guide rods of an HMD device to allow the optical module11.3.2-200 to adjust in position relative to the user’s eyes for match the user’s interpapillary distance (IPD). The housing 11.3.2-202 can slidably engage the guide rods to secure the optical module 11.3.2-200 in place within the HMD.

[0141] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-200 can also include a lens11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202 and disposed between the display assembly11.3.2-204 and the user’s eyes when the HMD is donned. The lens 11.3.2-216 can beconfigured to direct light from the display assembly 11.3.2-204 to the user’s eye. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2-216 can be a part of a lens assembly including a corrective lens removably attached to the optical module 11.3.2-200. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2- 216 is disposed over the light strip 11.3.2-208 and the one or more eye-tracking cameras 11.3.2-206 such that the camera 11.3.2-206 is configured to capture images of the user’s eye through the lens 11.3.2-216 and the light strip 11.3.2-208 includes lights configured to project light through the lens 11.3.2-216 to the users’ eye during use.

[0142] Any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown in FIG. IP can be included, either alone or in any combination, in any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and parts and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and / or parts, including the arrangements and configurations thereof shown and described herein can be included, either alone or in any combination, in the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in FIG. IP.

[0143] Figure 2 is a block diagram of an example of the controller 110 in accordance with some embodiments. While certain specific features are illustrated, those skilled in the art will appreciate from the present disclosure that various other features have not been illustrated for the sake of brevity, and so as not to obscure more pertinent aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. To that end, as a non-limiting example, in some embodiments, the controller 110 includes one or more processing units 202 (e.g., microprocessors, application-specific integrated-circuits (ASICs), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), graphics processing units (GPUs), central processing units (CPUs), processing cores, and / or the like), one or more input / output (I / O) devices 206, one or more communication interfaces 208 (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.1 lx, IEEE 802.16x, global system for mobile communications (GSM), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), global positioning system (GPS), infrared (IR), BLUETOOTH, ZIGBEE, and / or the like type interface), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 210, a memory 220, and one or more communication buses 204 for interconnecting these and various other components.

[0144] In some embodiments, the one or more communication buses 204 include circuitry that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Insome embodiments, the one or more I / O devices 206 include at least one of a keyboard, a mouse, a touchpad, a joystick, one or more microphones, one or more speakers, one or more image sensors, one or more displays, and / or the like.

[0145] The memory 220 includes high-speed random-access memory, such as dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), static random-access memory (SRAM), double- data-rate random-access memory (DDR RAM), or other random-access solid-state memory devices. In some embodiments, the memory 220 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 220 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from the one or more processing units 202. The memory 220 comprises a non-transitory computer readable storage medium. In some embodiments, the memory 220 or the non-transitory computer readable storage medium of the memory 220 stores the following programs, modules and data structures, or a subset thereof including an optional operating system 230 and an XR experience module 240.

[0146] The operating system 230 includes instructions for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware dependent tasks. In some embodiments, the XR experience module 240 is configured to manage and coordinate one or more XR experiences for one or more users (e.g., a single XR experience for one or more users, or multiple XR experiences for respective groups of one or more users). To that end, in various embodiments, the XR experience module 240 includes a data obtaining unit 242, a tracking unit 244, a coordination unit 246, and a data transmitting unit 248.

[0147] In some embodiments, the data obtaining unit 242 is configured to obtain data (e.g., presentation data, interaction data, sensor data, location data, etc.) from at least the display generation component 120 of Figure 1 A, and optionally one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in various embodiments, the data obtaining unit 242 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0148] In some embodiments, the tracking unit 244 is configured to map the scene 105 and to track the position / location of at least the display generation component 120 with respect to the scene 105 of Figure 1 A, and optionally, to one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in variousembodiments, the tracking unit 244 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor. In some embodiments, the tracking unit 244 includes hand tracking unit 245 and / or eye tracking unit 243. In some embodiments, the hand tracking unit 245 is configured to track the position / location of one or more portions of the user’s hands, and / or motions of one or more portions of the user’s hands with respect to the scene 105 of Figure 1 A, relative to the display generation component 120, and / or relative to a coordinate system defined relative to the user’s hand. The hand tracking unit 245 is described in greater detail below with respect to Figure 4. In some embodiments, the eye tracking unit 243 is configured to track the position and movement of the user’s gaze (or more broadly, the user’s eyes, face, or head) with respect to the scene 105 (e.g., with respect to the physical environment and / or to the user (e.g., the user’s hand)) or with respect to the XR content displayed via the display generation component 120. The eye tracking unit 243 is described in greater detail below with respect to Figure 5.

[0149] In some embodiments, the coordination unit 246 is configured to manage and coordinate the XR experience presented to the user by the display generation component 120, and optionally, by one or more of the output devices 155 and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in various embodiments, the coordination unit 246 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0150] In some embodiments, the data transmitting unit 248 is configured to transmit data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least the display generation component 120, and optionally, to one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in various embodiments, the data transmitting unit 248 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0151] Although the data obtaining unit 242, the tracking unit 244 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 245), the coordination unit 246, and the data transmitting unit 248 are shown as residing on a single device (e.g., the controller 110), it should be understood that in other embodiments, any combination of the data obtaining unit 242, the tracking unit 244 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 245), the coordination unit 246, and the data transmitting unit 248 may be located in separate computing devices.

[0152] Moreover, Figure 2 is intended more as functional description of the various features that may be present in a particular implementation as opposed to a structural schematic of the embodiments described herein. As recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, items shown separately could be combined and some items could be separated. For example, some functional modules shown separately in Figure 2 could be implemented in a single module and the various functions of single functional blocks could be implemented by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules and the division of particular functions and how features are allocated among them will vary from one implementation to another and, in some embodiments, depends in part on the particular combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware chosen for a particular implementation.

[0153] Figure 3 A is a block diagram of an example of the display generation component 120 in accordance with some embodiments. While certain specific features are illustrated, those skilled in the art will appreciate from the present disclosure that various other features have not been illustrated for the sake of brevity, and so as not to obscure more pertinent aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. To that end, as a non-limiting example, in some embodiments the display generation component 120 (e.g., HMD) includes one or more processing units 302 (e.g., microprocessors, ASICs, FPGAs, GPUs, CPUs, processing cores, and / or the like), one or more input / output (I / O) devices and sensors 306, one or more communication interfaces 308 (e g., USB, FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.1 lx, IEEE 802.16x, GSM, CDMA, TDMA, GPS, IR, BLUETOOTH, ZIGBEE, and / or the like type interface), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 310, one or more XR displays 312, one or more optional interior- and / or exterior-facing image sensors 314, a memory 320, and one or more communication buses 304 for interconnecting these and various other components.

[0154] In some embodiments, the one or more communication buses 304 include circuitry that interconnects and controls communications between system components. In some embodiments, the one or more I / O devices and sensors 306 include at least one of an inertial measurement unit (IMU), an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a thermometer, one or more physiological sensors (e.g., blood pressure monitor, heart rate monitor, blood oxygen sensor, blood glucose sensor, etc.), one or more microphones, one or more speakers, a haptics engine, one or more depth sensors (e.g., a structured light, a time-of-flight, or the like), and / or the like.

[0155] In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are configured to provide the XR experience to the user. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 correspond to holographic, digital light processing (DLP), liquid-crystal display (LCD), liquid-crystal on silicon (LCoS), organic light-emitting field-effect transistor (OLET), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), surface-conduction electron-emitter display (SED), field-emission display (FED), quantum-dot light-emitting diode (QD-LED), micro-electro- mechanical system (MEMS), and / or the like display types. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 correspond to diffractive, reflective, polarized, holographic, etc. waveguide displays. For example, the display generation component 120 (e.g., HMD) includes a single XR display. In another example, the display generation component 120 includes an XR display for each eye of the user. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting MR and VR content. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting MR or VR content.

[0156] In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to obtain image data that corresponds to at least a portion of the face of the user that includes the eyes of the user (and may be referred to as an eye-tracking camera). In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to obtain image data that corresponds to at least a portion of the user’s hand(s) and optionally arm(s) of the user (and may be referred to as a hand-tracking camera). In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to be forward-facing so as to obtain image data that corresponds to the scene as would be viewed by the user if the display generation component 120 (e.g., HMD) was not present (and may be referred to as a scene camera). The one or more optional image sensors 314 can include one or more RGB cameras (e.g., with a complimentary metal-oxide- semiconductor (CMOS) image sensor or a charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor), one or more infrared (IR) cameras, one or more event-based cameras, and / or the like.

[0157] The memory 320 includes high-speed random-access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random-access solid-state memory devices. In some embodiments, the memory 320 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 320 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from the one or more processing units 302. The memory 320 comprises a non-transitory computer readable storage medium. In some embodiments, the memory 320 orthe non-transitory computer readable storage medium of the memory 320 stores the following programs, modules and data structures, or a subset thereof including an optional operating system 330 and an XR presentation module 340.

[0158] The operating system 330 includes instructions for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware dependent tasks. In some embodiments, the XR presentation module 340 is configured to present XR content to the user via the one or more XR displays 312. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR presentation module 340 includes a data obtaining unit 342, an XR presenting unit 344, an XR map generating unit 346, and a data transmitting unit 348.

[0159] In some embodiments, the data obtaining unit 342 is configured to obtain data (e.g., presentation data, interaction data, sensor data, location data, etc.) from at least the controller 110 of Figure 1 A. To that end, in various embodiments, the data obtaining unit 342 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0160] In some embodiments, the XR presenting unit 344 is configured to present XR content via the one or more XR displays 312. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR presenting unit 344 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0161] In some embodiments, the XR map generating unit 346 is configured to generate an XR map (e.g., a 3D map of the mixed reality scene or a map of the physical environment into which computer-generated objects can be placed to generate the extended reality) based on media content data. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR map generating unit 346 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0162] In some embodiments, the data transmitting unit 348 is configured to transmit data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least the controller 110, and optionally one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in various embodiments, the data transmitting unit 348 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, and heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0163] Although the data obtaining unit 342, the XR presenting unit 344, the XR map generating unit 346, and the data transmitting unit 348 are shown as residing on a single device (e.g., the display generation component 120 of Figure 1 A), it should be understoodthat in other embodiments, any combination of the data obtaining unit 342, the XR presenting unit 344, the XR map generating unit 346, and the data transmitting unit 348 may be located in separate computing devices.

[0164] Moreover, Figure 3 A is intended more as a functional description of the various features that could be present in a particular implementation as opposed to a structural schematic of the embodiments described herein. As recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, items shown separately could be combined and some items could be separated. For example, some functional modules shown separately in Figure 3A could be implemented in a single module and the various functions of single functional blocks could be implemented by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules and the division of particular functions and how features are allocated among them will vary from one implementation to another and, in some embodiments, depends in part on the particular combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware chosen for a particular implementation.

[0165] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure can be partially or entirely realized using a tangible computer-readable storage medium (or multiple tangible computer-readable storage media of one or more types) encoding one or more computer- readable instructions. It should be recognized that computer-readable instructions can be organized in any format, including applications, widgets, processes, software, and / or components.

[0166] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure include a computer-readable storage medium that encodes instructions organized as an application (e.g., application 3160) that, when executed by one or more processing units, control an electronic device (e.g., device 3150) to perform the method of FIG. 3B, the method of FIG. 3C, and / or one or more other processes and / or methods described herein.

[0167] It should be recognized that application 3160 (shown in FIG. 3D) can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and / or a maps application. In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is pre-installed ondevice 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is provided to device 3150 via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application or a second-party application). In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store can be an application store that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store). In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another application store, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device).

[0168] Referring to FIG. 3B and FIG. 3F, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3010). In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one hardware component of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one software module of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one hardware component external to device 3150 (e.g., a peripheral device, an accessory device, and / or a server). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3010 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information, electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and / or motion information. In some embodiments, in response to and / or after obtaining the information at 3010, application 3160 provides the information to a system (e.g., 3020).

[0169] In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 3E) is an operating system hosted on device 3150. In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 3E) is an external device (e.g., a server, a peripheral device, an accessory, and / or a personal computing device) that includes an operating system.

[0170] Referring to FIG. 3C and FIG. 3G, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3030). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3030 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and / or motion information. In response to and / or after obtaining the information at 3030, application 3160 performs an operation with the information (e.g., 3040). In some embodiments, the operation performed at3040 includes: providing a notification based on the information, sending a message based on the information, displaying the information, controlling a user interface of a fitness application based on the information, controlling a user interface of a health application based on the information, controlling a focus mode based on the information, setting a reminder based on the information, adding a calendar entry based on the information, and / or calling an API of system 3110 based on the information.

[0171] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C is performed in response to a trigger. In some embodiments, the trigger includes detection of an event, a notification received from system 3110, a user input, and / or a response to a call to an API provided by system 3110.

[0172] In some embodiments, the instructions of application 3160, when executed, control device 3150 to perform the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C by calling an application programming interface (API) (e.g., API 3190) provided by system 3110. In some embodiments, application 3160 performs at least a portion of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C without calling API 3190.

[0173] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C includes calling an API (e.g., API 3190) using one or more parameters defined by the API. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters include a constant, a key, a data structure, an object, an object class, a variable, a data type, a pointer, an array, a list or a pointer to a function or method, and / or another way to reference a data or other item to be passed via the API.

[0174] Referring to FIG. 3D, device 3150 is illustrated. In some embodiments, device 3150 is a personal computing device, a smart phone, a smart watch, a fitness tracker, a head mounted display (HMD) device, a media device, a communal device, a speaker, a television, and / or a tablet. As illustrated in FIG. 3D, device 3150 includes application 3160 and an operating system (e.g., system 3110 shown in FIG. 3E). Application 3160 includes application implementation module 3170 and API-calling module 3180. System 3110 includes API 3190 and implementation module 3100. It should be recognized that device 3150, application 3160, and / or system 3110 can include more, fewer, and / or different components than illustrated in FIGS. 3D and 3E.

[0175] In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 includes a set of one or more instructions corresponding to one or more operations performed by application 3160. For example, when application 3160 is a messaging application, application implementation module 3170 can include operations to receive and send messages. In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 communicates with API-calling module 3180 to communicate with system 3110 via API 3190 (shown in FIG. 3E).

[0176] In some embodiments, API 3190 is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and / or use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and / or other services provided by implementation module 3100 of system 3110. For example, API-calling module 3180 can access a feature of implementation module 3100 through one or more API calls or invocations (e.g., embodied by a function or a method call) exposed by API 3190 (e.g., a software and / or hardware module that can receive API calls, respond to API calls, and / or send API calls) and can pass data and / or control information using one or more parameters via the API calls or invocations. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows application 3160 to use a service provided by a Software Development Kit (SDK) library. In some embodiments, application 3160 incorporates a call to a function or method provided by the SDK library and provided by API 3190 or uses data types or objects defined in the SDK library and provided by API 3190. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 makes an API call via API 3190 to access and use a feature of implementation module 3100 that is specified by API 3190. In such embodiments, implementation module 3100 can return a value via API 3190 to API- calling module 3180 in response to the API call. The value can report to application 3160 the capabilities or state of a hardware component of device 3150, including those related to aspects such as input capabilities and state, output capabilities and state, processing capability, power state, storage capacity and state, and / or communications capability. In some embodiments, API 3190 is implemented in part by firmware, microcode, or other low level logic that executes in part on the hardware component.

[0177] In some embodiments, API 3190 allows a developer of API-calling module 3180 (which can be a third-party developer) to leverage a feature provided by implementation module 3100. In such embodiments, there can be one or more API calling modules (e.g., including API-calling module 3180) that communicate with implementation module 3100. Insome embodiments, API 3190 allows multiple API calling modules written in different programming languages to communicate with implementation module 3100 (e.g., API 3190 can include features for translating calls and returns between implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180) while API 3190 is implemented in terms of a specific programming language. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 calls APIs from different providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from a plug-in provider, and / or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.

[0178] Examples of API 3190 can include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, photos API, camera API, and / or image processing API. In some embodiments, the sensor API is an API for accessing data associated with a sensor of device 3150. For example, the sensor API can provide access to raw sensor data. For another example, the sensor API can provide data derived (and / or generated) from the raw sensor data. In some embodiments, the sensor data includes temperature data, image data, video data, audio data, heart rate data, IMU (inertial measurement unit) data, lidar data, location data, GPS data, and / or camera data. In some embodiments, the sensor includes one or more of an accelerometer, temperature sensor, infrared sensor, optical sensor, heartrate sensor, barometer, gyroscope, proximity sensor, temperature sensor, and / or biometric sensor.

[0179] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is a system (e.g., operating system, and / or server system) software module (e.g., a collection of computer- readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via API 3190. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is constructed to provide an API response (via API 3190) as a result of processing an API call. By way of example, implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can each be any one of an operating system, a library, a device driver, an API, an application program, or othermodule. It should be understood that implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can be the same or different type of module from each other. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is embodied at least in part in firmware, microcode, or hardware logic.

[0180] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 returns a value through API 3190 in response to an API call from API-calling module 3180. While API 3190 defines the syntax and result of an API call (e.g., how to invoke the API call and what the API call does), API 3190 might not reveal how implementation module 3100 accomplishes the function specified by the API call. Various API calls are transferred via the one or more application programming interfaces between API-calling module 3180 and implementation module 3100. Transferring the API calls can include issuing, initiating, invoking, calling, receiving, returning, and / or responding to the function calls or messages. In other words, transferring can describe actions by either of API-calling module 3180 or implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, a function call or other invocation of API 3190 sends and / or receives one or more parameters through a parameter list or other structure.

[0181] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 provides more than one API, each providing a different view of or with different aspects of functionality implemented by implementation module 3100. For example, one API of implementation module 3100 can provide a first set of functions and can be exposed to third-party developers, and another API of implementation module 3100 can be hidden (e.g., not exposed) and provide a subset of the first set of functions and also provide another set of functions, such as testing or debugging functions which are not in the first set of functions. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 calls one or more other components via an underlying API and thus is both an API calling module and an implementation module. It should be recognized that implementation module 3100 can include additional functions, methods, classes, data structures, and / or other features that are not specified through API 3190 and are not available to API-calling module 3180. It should also be recognized that API-calling module 3180 can be on the same system as implementation module 3100 or can be located remotely and access implementation module 3100 using API 3190 over a network. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100, API 3190, and / or API-calling module 3180 is stored in a machine-readable medium, which includes any mechanism for storing information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer or other data processing system). For example, amachine-readable medium can include magnetic disks, optical disks, random access memory; read only memory, and / or flash memory devices.

[0182] An application programming interface (API) is an interface between a first software process and a second software process that specifies a format for communication between the first software process and the second software process. Limited APIs (e.g., private APIs or partner APIs) are APIs that are accessible to a limited set of software processes (e.g., only software processes within an operating system or only software processes that are approved to access the limited APIs). Public APIs that are accessible to a wider set of software processes. Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about or set a state of one or more input devices (e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion / orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and / or external controllers). Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and / or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and / or one or more tactile output generation components). Some APIs enable particular capabilities (e.g., scrolling, handwriting, text entry, image editing, and / or image creation) to be accessed, performed, and / or used by a software process (e.g., generating outputs for use by a software process based on input from the software process). Some APIs enable content from a software process to be inserted into a template and displayed in a user interface that has a layout and / or behaviors that are specified by the template.

[0183] Many software platforms include a set of frameworks that provides the core objects and core behaviors that a software developer needs to build software applications that can be used on the software platform. Software developers use these objects to display content onscreen, to interact with that content, and to manage interactions with the software platform. Software applications rely on the set of frameworks for their basic behavior, and the set of frameworks provides many ways for the software developer to customize the behavior of the application to match the specific needs of the software application. Many of these core objects and core behaviors are accessed via an API. An API will typically specify a format for communication between software processes, including specifying and grouping available variables, functions, and protocols. An API call (sometimes referred to as an API request) will typically be sent from a sending software process to a receiving software process as away to accomplish one or more of the following: the sending software process requesting information from the receiving software process (e.g., for the sending software process to take action on), the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process (e.g., for the receiving software process to take action on), the sending software process requesting action by the receiving software process, or the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process about action taken by the sending software process. Interaction with a device (e.g., using a user interface) will in some circumstances include the transfer and / or receipt of one or more API calls (e.g., multiple API calls) between multiple different software processes (e.g., different portions of an operating system, an application and an operating system, or different applications) via one or more APIs (e.g., via multiple different APIs). For example, when an input is detected the direct sensor data is frequently processed into one or more input events that are provided (e.g., via an API) to a receiving software process that makes some determination based on the input events, and then sends (e.g., via an API) information to a software process to perform an operation (e.g., change a device state and / or user interface) based on the determination. While a determination and an operation performed in response could be made by the same software process, alternatively the determination could be made in a first software process and relayed (e.g., via an API) to a second software process, that is different from the first software process, that causes the operation to be performed by the second software process.Alternatively, the second software process could relay instructions (e.g., via an API) to a third software process that is different from the first software process and / or the second software process to perform the operation. It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls within a step of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems). It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls between steps of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems).

[0184] In some embodiments, the application can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions asan execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and / or a maps application.

[0185] In some embodiments, the application is an application that is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided to the first computer system via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store) and allows download of one or more applications. In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another device, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application is a third-party application (e.g., an app that is provided by an application store, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application controls the first computer system to perform method 12000 (Figures 12A-12G), method 13000 (Figures 13A-13G), method 14000 (Figures 14A-14H), method 15000 (Figures 15A-15F), and / or method 16000 (Figures 16A-16C) by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by the system process using one or more parameters.

[0186] In some embodiments, exemplary APIs provided by the system process include one or more of a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, a contact transfer API, a photos API, a camera API, and / or an image processing API.

[0187] In some embodiments, at least one API is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module(e.g., an API calling module) to access and use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and / or other services provided by an implementation module of the system process. The API can define one or more parameters that are passed between the API calling module and the implementation module. In some embodiments, API 3190 defines a first API call that can be provided by API-calling module 3180. The implementation module is a system software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via the API. In some embodiments, the implementation module is constructed to provide an API response (via the API) as a result of processing an API call. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in the device (e.g., 3150) that runs the application. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in an electronic device that is separate from the device that runs the application.

[0188] Figure 4 is a schematic, pictorial illustration of an example embodiment of the hand tracking device 140. In some embodiments, hand tracking device 140 (Figure 1 A) is controlled by hand tracking unit 245 (Figure 2) to track the position / location of one or more portions of the user’s hands, and / or motions of one or more portions of the user’s hands with respect to the scene 105 of Figure 1 A (e.g., with respect to a portion of the physical environment surrounding the user, with respect to the display generation component 120, or with respect to a portion of the user (e.g., the user’s face, eyes, or head), and / or relative to a coordinate system defined relative to the user’s hand. In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 is part of the display generation component 120 (e.g., embedded in or attached to a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 is separate from the display generation component 120 (e.g., located in separate housings or attached to separate physical support structures).

[0189] In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 includes image sensors 404 (e.g., one or more IR cameras, 3D cameras, depth cameras, and / or color cameras, etc.) that capture three-dimensional scene information that includes at least a hand 406 of a human user. The image sensors 404 capture the hand images with sufficient resolution to enable the fingers and their respective positions to be distinguished. The image sensors 404 typically capture images of other parts of the user’s body, as well, or possibly all of the body, and may have either zoom capabilities or a dedicated sensor with enhanced magnification to capture images of the hand with the desired resolution. In some embodiments, the image sensors 404also capture 2D color video images of the hand 406 and other elements of the scene. In some embodiments, the image sensors 404 are used in conjunction with other image sensors to capture the physical environment of the scene 105, or serve as the image sensors that capture the physical environment of the scene 105. In some embodiments, the image sensors 404 are positioned relative to the user or the user’s environment in a way that a field of view of the image sensors or a portion thereof is used to define an interaction space in which hand movement captured by the image sensors are treated as inputs to the controller 110.

[0190] In some embodiments, the image sensors 404 output a sequence of frames containing 3D map data (and possibly color image data, as well) to the controller 110, which extracts high-level information from the map data. This high-level information is typically provided via an Application Program Interface (API) to an application running on the controller, which drives the display generation component 120 accordingly. For example, the user may interact with software running on the controller 110 by moving their hand 406 and / or changing their hand posture.

[0191] In some embodiments, the image sensors 404 project a pattern of spots onto a scene containing the hand 406 and capture an image of the projected pattern. In some embodiments, the controller 110 computes the 3D coordinates of points in the scene (including points on the surface of the user’s hand) by triangulation, based on transverse shifts of the spots in the pattern. This approach is advantageous in that it does not require the user to hold or wear any sort of beacon, sensor, or other marker. It gives the depth coordinates of points in the scene relative to a predetermined reference plane, at a certain distance from the image sensors 404. In the present disclosure, the image sensors 404 are assumed to define an orthogonal set of x, y, z axes, so that depth coordinates of points in the scene correspond to z components measured by the image sensors. Alternatively, the image sensors 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device) may use other methods of 3D mapping, such as stereoscopic imaging or time-of-flight measurements, based on single or multiple cameras or other types of sensors.

[0192] In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 captures and processes a temporal sequence of depth maps containing the user’s hand, while the user moves their hand (e.g., whole hand or one or more fingers). Software running on a processor in the image sensors 404 and / or the controller 110 processes the 3D map data to extract patch descriptorsof the hand in these depth maps. The software matches these descriptors to patch descriptors stored in a database 408, based on a prior learning process, in order to estimate the pose of the hand in each frame. The pose typically includes 3D locations of the user’s hand joints and fingertips.

[0193] The software may also analyze the trajectory of the hands and / or fingers over multiple frames in the sequence in order to identify gestures. The pose estimation functions described herein may be interleaved with motion tracking functions, so that patch-based pose estimation is performed only once in every two (or more) frames, while tracking is used to find changes in the pose that occur over the remaining frames. The pose, motion, and gesture information are provided via the above-mentioned API to an application program running on the controller 110. This program may, for example, move and modify images presented on the display generation component 120, or perform other functions, in response to the pose and / or gesture information.

[0194] In some embodiments, a gesture includes an air gesture. An air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching (or independently of) an input element that is part of a device (e.g., computer system 101, one or more input device 125, and / or hand tracking device 140) and is based on detected motion of a portion (e.g., the head, one or more arms, one or more hands, one or more fingers, and / or one or more legs) of the user’s body through the air including motion of the user’s body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user’s arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user’s hand relative to the ground), relative to another portion of the user’s body (e.g., movement of a hand of the user relative to a shoulder of the user, movement of one hand of the user relative to another hand of the user, and / or movement of a finger of the user relative to another finger or portion of a hand of the user), and / or absolute motion of a portion of the user’s body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and / or speed, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user’s body).

[0195] In some embodiments, input gestures used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include air gestures performed by movement of the user’s finger(s) relative to other finger(s) or part(s) of the user’s hand) for interacting with an XR environment (e.g., a virtual or mixed-reality environment), in accordance with someembodiments. In some embodiments, an air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independently of an input element that is a part of the device) and is based on detected motion of a portion of the user’s body through the air including motion of the user’s body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user’s arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user’s hand relative to the ground), relative to another portion of the user’s body (e.g., movement of a hand of the user relative to a shoulder of the user, movement of one hand of the user relative to another hand of the user, and / or movement of a finger of the user relative to another finger or portion of a hand of the user), and / or absolute motion of a portion of the user’s body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and / or speed, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user’s body).

[0196] In some embodiments in which the input gesture is an air gesture (e.g., in the absence of physical contact with an input device that provides the computer system with information about which user interface element is the target of the user input, such as contact with a user interface element displayed on a touchscreen, or contact with a mouse or trackpad to move a cursor to the user interface element), the gesture takes into account the user's attention (e.g., gaze) to determine the target of the user input (e.g., for direct inputs, as described below). Thus, in implementations involving air gestures, the input gesture is, for example, detected attention (e.g., gaze) toward the user interface element in combination (e.g., concurrent) with movement of a user's finger(s) and / or hands to perform a pinch and / or tap input, as described in more detail below.

[0197] In some embodiments, input gestures that are directed to a user interface object are performed directly or indirectly with reference to a user interface object. For example, a user input is performed directly on the user interface object in accordance with performing the input gesture with the user’s hand at a position that corresponds to the position of the user interface object in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., as determined based on a current viewpoint of the user). In some embodiments, the input gesture is performed indirectly on the user interface object in accordance with the user performing the input gesture while a position of the user’s hand is not at the position that corresponds to the position of the user interface object in the three-dimensional environment while detecting the user’s attention (e.g., gaze) on the user interface object. For example, for direct input gesture,the user is enabled to direct the user’s input to the user interface object by initiating the gesture at, or near, a position corresponding to the displayed position of the user interface object (e.g., within 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 5 cm, or a distance between 0-5 cm, as measured from an outer edge of the option or a center portion of the option). For an indirect input gesture, the user is enabled to direct the user’s input to the user interface object by paying attention to the user interface object (e.g., by gazing at the user interface object) and, while paying attention to the option, the user initiates the input gesture (e.g., at any position that is detectable by the computer system) (e.g., at a position that does not correspond to the displayed position of the user interface object).

[0198] In some embodiments, input gestures (e.g., air gestures) used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include pinch inputs and tap inputs, for interacting with a virtual or mixed-reality environment, in accordance with some embodiments. For example, the pinch inputs and tap inputs described below are performed as air gestures.

[0199] In some embodiments, a pinch input is part of an air gesture that includes one or more of: a pinch gesture, a long pinch gesture, a pinch and drag gesture, or a double pinch gesture. For example, a pinch gesture that is an air gesture includes movement of two or more fingers of a hand to make contact with one another, that is, optionally, followed by an immediate (e.g., within 0-1 seconds) break in contact from each other. A long pinch gesture that is an air gesture includes movement of two or more fingers of a hand to make contact with one another for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., at least 1 second), before detecting a break in contact with one another. For example, a long pinch gesture includes the user holding a pinch gesture (e.g., with the two or more fingers making contact), and the long pinch gesture continues until a break in contact between the two or more fingers is detected. In some embodiments, a double pinch gesture that is an air gesture comprises two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs (e.g., performed by the same hand) detected in immediate (e.g., within a predefined time period) succession of each other. For example, the user performs a first pinch input (e.g., a pinch input or a long pinch input), releases the first pinch input (e.g., breaks contact between the two or more fingers), and performs a second pinch input within a predefined time period (e.g., within 1 second or within 2 seconds) after releasing the first pinch input.

[0200] In some embodiments, a pinch and drag gesture that is an air gesture (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture) includes a pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch gesture or a long pinch gesture) performed in conjunction with (e.g., followed by) a drag input that changes a position of the user’s hand from a first position (e.g., a start position of the drag) to a second position (e.g., an end position of the drag). In some embodiments, the user maintains the pinch gesture while performing the drag input, and releases the pinch gesture (e.g., opens their two or more fingers) to end the drag gesture (e.g., at the second position). In some embodiments, the pinch input and the drag input are performed by the same hand (e.g., the user pinches two or more fingers to make contact with one another and moves the same hand to the second position in the air with the drag gesture). In some embodiments, the pinch input is performed by a first hand of the user and the drag input is performed by the second hand of the user (e.g., the user’s second hand moves from the first position to the second position in the air while the user continues the pinch input with the user’s first hand. In some embodiments, an input gesture that is an air gesture includes inputs (e.g., pinch and / or tap inputs) performed using both of the user’s two hands. For example, the input gesture includes two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs performed in conjunction with (e.g., concurrently with, or within a predefined time period of) each other. For example, a first pinch gesture is performed using a first hand of the user (e.g., a pinch input, a long pinch input, or a pinch and drag input), and, in conjunction with performing the pinch input using the first hand, a second pinch input is performed using the other hand (e.g., the second hand of the user’s two hands). In some embodiments, movement between the user’s two hands is performed (e.g., to increase and / or decrease a distance or relative orientation between the user’s two hands).

[0201] In some embodiments, a tap input (e.g., directed to a user interface element) performed as an air gesture includes movement of a user's finger(s) toward the user interface element, movement of the user's hand toward the user interface element optionally with the user’s finger(s) extended toward the user interface element, a downward motion of a user's finger (e.g., mimicking a mouse click motion or a tap on a touchscreen), or other predefined movement of the user’s hand. In some embodiments a tap input that is performed as an air gesture is detected based on movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture movement of a finger or hand away from the viewpoint of the user and / or toward an object that is the target of the tap input followed by an end of the movement. In some embodiments the end of the movement is detected based on a change in movementcharacteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture (e.g., an end of movement away from the viewpoint of the user and / or toward the object that is the target of the tap input, a reversal of direction of movement of the finger or hand, and / or a reversal of a direction of acceleration of movement of the finger or hand).

[0202] In some embodiments, attention of a user is determined to be directed to a portion of the three-dimensional environment based on detection of gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment (optionally, without requiring other conditions). In some embodiments, attention of a user is determined to be directed to a portion of the three-dimensional environment based on detection of gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment with one or more additional conditions such as requiring that gaze is directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment for at least a threshold duration (e.g., a dwell duration) and / or requiring that the gaze is directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment while the viewpoint of the user is within a distance threshold from the portion of the three-dimensional environment in order for the device to determine that attention of the user is directed to the portion of the three- dimensional environment, where if one of the additional conditions is not met, the device determines that attention is not directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment toward which gaze is directed (e.g., until the one or more additional conditions are met).

[0203] In some embodiments, the detection of a ready state configuration of a user or a portion of a user is detected by the computer system. Detection of a ready state configuration of a hand is used by a computer system as an indication that the user is likely preparing to interact with the computer system using one or more air gesture inputs performed by the hand (e.g., a pinch, tap, pinch and drag, double pinch, long pinch, or other air gesture described herein). For example, the ready state of the hand is determined based on whether the hand has a predetermined hand shape (e.g., a pre-pinch shape with a thumb and one or more fingers extended and spaced apart ready to make a pinch or grab gesture or a pretap with one or more fingers extended and palm facing away from the user), based on whether the hand is in a predetermined position relative to a viewpoint of the user (e.g., below the user’s head and above the user’s waist and extended out from the body by at least 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50cm), and / or based on whether the hand has moved in a particular manner (e.g., moved toward a region in front of the user above the user’s waist and below the user’s head or moved away from the user’s body or leg). In some embodiments, the ready state isused to determine whether interactive elements of the user interface respond to attention (e.g., gaze) inputs.

[0204] In scenarios where inputs are described with reference to air gestures, it should be understood that similar gestures could be detected using a hardware input device that is attached to or held by one or more hands of a user, where the position of the hardware input device in space can be tracked using optical tracking, one or more accelerometers, one or more gyroscopes, one or more magnetometers, and / or one or more inertial measurement units and the position and / or movement of the hardware input device is used in place of the position and / or movement of the one or more hands in the corresponding air gesture(s). In scenarios where inputs are described with reference to air gestures, it should be understood that similar gestures could be detected using a hardware input device that is attached to or held by one or more hands of a user. User inputs can be detected with controls contained in the hardware input device such as one or more touch-sensitive input elements, one or more pressure-sensitive input elements, one or more buttons, one or more knobs, one or more dials, one or more joysticks, one or more hand or finger coverings that can detect a position or change in position of portions of a hand and / or fingers relative to each other, relative to the user’s body, and / or relative to a physical environment of the user, and / or other hardware input device controls, where the user inputs with the controls contained in the hardware input device are used in place of hand and / or finger gestures such as air taps or air pinches in the corresponding air gesture(s). For example, a selection input that is described as being performed with an air tap or air pinch input could be alternatively detected with a button press, a tap on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or other hardware input. As another example, a movement input that is described as being performed with an air pinch and drag (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture) could be alternatively detected based on an interaction with the hardware input control such as a button press and hold, a touch on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or other hardware input that is followed by movement of the hardware input device (e.g., along with the hand with which the hardware input device is associated) through space. Similarly, a two-handed input that includes movement of the hands relative to each other could be performed with one air gesture and one hardware input device in the hand that is not performing the air gesture, two hardware input devices held in different hands, or two airgestures performed by different hands using various combinations of air gestures and / or the inputs detected by one or more hardware input devices that are described above.

[0205] In some embodiments, the software may be downloaded to the controller 110 in electronic form, over a network, for example, or it may alternatively be provided on tangible, non-transitory media, such as optical, magnetic, or electronic memory media. In some embodiments, the database 408 is likewise stored in a memory associated with the controller 110. Alternatively or additionally, some or all of the described functions of the computer may be implemented in dedicated hardware, such as a custom or semi-custom integrated circuit or a programmable digital signal processor (DSP). Although the controller 110 is shown in Figure 4, by way of example, as a separate unit from the image sensors 404, some or all of the processing functions of the controller may be performed by a suitable microprocessor and software or by dedicated circuitry within the housing of the image sensors 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device) or otherwise associated with the image sensors 404. In some embodiments, at least some of these processing functions may be carried out by a suitable processor that is integrated with the display generation component 120 (e.g., in a television set, a handheld device, or head-mounted device, for example) or with any other suitable computerized device, such as a game console or media player. The sensing functions of image sensors 404 may likewise be integrated into the computer or other computerized apparatus that is to be controlled by the sensor output.

[0206] Figure 4 further includes a schematic representation of a depth map 410 captured by the image sensors 404, in accordance with some embodiments. The depth map, as explained above, comprises a matrix of pixels having respective depth values. The pixels 412 corresponding to the hand 406 have been segmented out from the background and the wrist in this map. The brightness of each pixel within the depth map 410 corresponds inversely to its depth value, i.e., the measured z distance from the image sensors 404, with the shade of gray growing darker with increasing depth. The controller 110 processes these depth values in order to identify and segment a component of the image (i.e., a group of neighboring pixels) having characteristics of a human hand. These characteristics, may include, for example, overall size, shape and motion from frame to frame of the sequence of depth maps.

[0207] Figure 4 also schematically illustrates a hand skeleton 414 that controller 110 ultimately extracts from the depth map 410 of the hand 406, in accordance with some embodiments. In Figure 4, the hand skeleton 414 is superimposed on a hand background 416 that has been segmented from the original depth map. In some embodiments, key feature points of the hand (e.g., points corresponding to knuckles, fingertips, center of the palm, end of the hand connecting to wrist, etc.) and optionally on the wrist or arm connected to the hand are identified and located on the hand skeleton 414. In some embodiments, location and movements of these key feature points over multiple image frames are used by the controller 110 to determine the hand gestures performed by the hand or the current state of the hand, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0208] Figure 5 illustrates an example embodiment of the eye tracking device 130 (Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is controlled by the eye tracking unit 243 (Figure 2) to track the position and movement of the user’s gaze with respect to the scene 105 or with respect to the XR content displayed via the display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is integrated with the display generation component 120. For example, in some embodiments, when the display generation component 120 is a head-mounted device such as headset, helmet, goggles, or glasses, or a handheld device placed in a wearable frame, the head-mounted device includes both a component that generates the XR content for viewing by the user and a component for tracking the gaze of the user relative to the XR content. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is separate from the display generation component 120. For example, when display generation component is a handheld device or an XR chamber, the eye tracking device 130 is optionally a separate device from the handheld device or XR chamber. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is a head-mounted device or part of a head-mounted device. In some embodiments, the head-mounted eye-tracking device 130 is optionally used in conjunction with a display generation component that is also headmounted, or a display generation component that is not head-mounted. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device, and is optionally used in conjunction with a head-mounted display generation component. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device, and is optionally part of a non-head- mounted display generation component.

[0209] In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 uses a display mechanism (e.g., left and right near-eye display panels) for displaying frames including left and right images in front of a user’s eyes to thus provide 3D virtual views to the user. For example, a head-mounted display generation component may include left and right optical lenses (referred to herein as eye lenses) located between the display and the user’s eyes. In some embodiments, the display generation component may include or be coupled to one or more external video cameras that capture video of the user’s environment for display. In some embodiments, a head-mounted display generation component may have a transparent or semi-transparent display through which a user may view the physical environment directly and display virtual objects on the transparent or semi-transparent display. In some embodiments, display generation component projects virtual objects into the physical environment. The virtual objects may be projected, for example, on a physical surface or as a holograph, so that an individual, using the system, observes the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. In such cases, separate display panels and image frames for the left and right eyes may not be necessary.

[0210] As shown in Figure 5, in some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 (e.g., a gaze tracking device) includes at least one eye tracking camera (e.g., infrared (IR) or near-IR (NIR) cameras), and illumination sources (e.g., IR or NIR light sources such as an array or ring of LEDs) that emit light (e.g., IR or NIR light) towards the user’s eyes. The eye tracking cameras may be pointed towards the user’s eyes to receive reflected IR or NIR light from the light sources directly from the eyes, or alternatively may be pointed towards “hot” mirrors located between the user’s eyes and the display panels that reflect IR or NIR light from the eyes to the eye tracking cameras while allowing visible light to pass. The eye tracking device 130 optionally captures images of the user’s eyes (e.g., as a video stream captured at 60-120 frames per second (fps)), analyze the images to generate gaze tracking information, and communicate the gaze tracking information to the controller 110. In some embodiments, two eyes of the user are separately tracked by respective eye tracking cameras and illumination sources. In some embodiments, only one eye of the user is tracked by a respective eye tracking camera and illumination sources.

[0211] In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is calibrated using a device-specific calibration process to determine parameters of the eye tracking device for the specific operating environment 100, for example the 3D geometric relationship andparameters of the LEDs, cameras, hot mirrors (if present), eye lenses, and display screen. The device-specific calibration process may be performed at the factory or another facility prior to delivery of the AR / VR equipment to the end user. The device-specific calibration process may be an automated calibration process or a manual calibration process. A user-specific calibration process may include an estimation of a specific user’s eye parameters, for example the pupil location, fovea location, optical axis, visual axis, eye spacing, etc. Once the device-specific and user- specific parameters are determined for the eye tracking device 130, images captured by the eye tracking cameras can be processed using a glint-assisted method to determine the current visual axis and point of gaze of the user with respect to the display, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0212] As shown in Figure 5, the eye tracking device 130 (e.g., 130A or 130B) includes eye lens(es) 520, and a gaze tracking system that includes at least one eye tracking camera 540 (e.g., infrared (IR) or near-IR (NIR) cameras) positioned on a side of the user’s face for which eye tracking is performed, and an illumination source 530 (e.g., IR or NIR light sources such as an array or ring of NIR light-emitting diodes (LEDs)) that emit light (e.g., IR or NIR light) towards the user’s eye(s) 592. The eye tracking cameras 540 may be pointed towards mirrors 550 located between the user’s eye(s) 592 and a display 510 (e.g., a left or right display panel of a head-mounted display, or a display of a handheld device, a projector, etc.) that reflect IR or NIR light from the eye(s) 592 while allowing visible light to pass (e.g., as shown in the top portion of Figure 5), or alternatively may be pointed towards the user’s eye(s) 592 to receive reflected IR or NIR light from the eye(s) 592 (e.g., as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 5).

[0213] In some embodiments, the controller 110 renders AR or VR frames 562 (e.g., left and right frames for left and right display panels) and provides the frames 562 to the display 510. The controller 110 uses gaze tracking input 542 from the eye tracking cameras 540 for various purposes, for example in processing the frames 562 for display. The controller 110 optionally estimates the user’s point of gaze on the display 510 based on the gaze tracking input 542 obtained from the eye tracking cameras 540 using the glint-assisted methods or other suitable methods. The point of gaze estimated from the gaze tracking input 542 is optionally used to determine the direction in which the user is currently looking.

[0214] The following describes several possible use cases for the user’s current gaze direction, and is not intended to be limiting. As an example use case, the controller 110 may render virtual content differently based on the determined direction of the user’s gaze. For example, the controller 110 may generate virtual content at a higher resolution in a foveal region determined from the user’s current gaze direction than in peripheral regions. As another example, the controller may position or move virtual content in the view based at least in part on the user’s current gaze direction. As another example, the controller may display particular virtual content in the view based at least in part on the user’s current gaze direction. As another example use case in AR applications, the controller 110 may direct external cameras for capturing the physical environments of the XR experience to focus in the determined direction. The autofocus mechanism of the external cameras may then focus on an object or surface in the environment that the user is currently looking at on the display 510. As another example use case, the eye lenses 520 may be focusable lenses, and the gaze tracking information is used by the controller to adjust the focus of the eye lenses 520 so that the virtual object that the user is currently looking at has the proper vergence to match the convergence of the user’s eyes 592. The controller 110 may leverage the gaze tracking information to direct the eye lenses 520 to adjust focus so that close objects that the user is looking at appear at the right distance.

[0215] In some embodiments, the eye tracking device is part of a head-mounted device that includes a display (e.g., display 510), two eye lenses (e.g., eye lens(es) 520), eye tracking cameras (e.g., eye tracking camera(s) 540), and light sources (e.g., illumination sources 530 (e.g., IR or NIR LEDs)), mounted in a wearable housing. The light sources emit light (e.g., IR or NIR light) towards the user’s eye(s) 592. In some embodiments, the light sources may be arranged in rings or circles around each of the lenses as shown in Figure 5. In some embodiments, eight illumination sources 530 (e.g., LEDs) are arranged around each lens 520 as an example. However, more or fewer illumination sources 530 may be used, and other arrangements and locations of illumination sources 530 may be used.

[0216] In some embodiments, the display 510 emits light in the visible light range and does not emit light in the IR or NIR range, and thus does not introduce noise in the gaze tracking system. Note that the location and angle of eye tracking camera(s) 540 is given by way of example, and is not intended to be limiting. In some embodiments, a single eye tracking camera 540 is located on each side of the user’s face. In some embodiments, two ormore NIR cameras 540 may be used on each side of the user’s face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 with a wider field of view (FOV) and a camera 540 with a narrower FOV may be used on each side of the user’s face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 that operates at one wavelength (e.g., 850nm) and a camera 540 that operates at a different wavelength (e.g., 940nm) may be used on each side of the user’s face.

[0217] Embodiments of the gaze tracking system as illustrated in Figure 5 may, for example, be used in computer-generated reality, virtual reality, and / or mixed reality applications to provide computer-generated reality, virtual reality, augmented reality, and / or augmented virtuality experiences to the user.

[0218] Figure 6 illustrates a glint-assisted gaze tracking pipeline, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the gaze tracking pipeline is implemented by a glint-assisted gaze tracking system (e.g., eye tracking device 130 as illustrated in Figures 1A and 5). The glint-assisted gaze tracking system may maintain a tracking state. Initially, the tracking state is off or “NO”. When in the tracking state, the glint-assisted gaze tracking system uses prior information from the previous frame when analyzing the current frame to track the pupil contour and glints in the current frame. When not in the tracking state, the glint-assisted gaze tracking system attempts to detect the pupil and glints in the current frame and, if successful, initializes the tracking state to “YES” and continues with the next frame in the tracking state.

[0219] As shown in Figure 6, the gaze tracking cameras may capture left and right images of the user’s left and right eyes. The captured images are then input to a gaze tracking pipeline for processing beginning at 610. As indicated by the arrow returning to element 600, the gaze tracking system may continue to capture images of the user’s eyes, for example at a rate of 60 to 120 frames per second. In some embodiments, each set of captured images may be input to the pipeline for processing. However, in some embodiments or under some conditions, not all captured frames are processed by the pipeline.

[0220] At 610, for the current captured images, if the tracking state is YES, then the method proceeds to element 640. At 610, if the tracking state is NO, then as indicated at 620 the images are analyzed to detect the user’s pupils and glints in the images. At 630, if the pupils and glints are successfully detected, then the method proceeds to element 640. Otherwise, the method returns to element 610 to process next images of the user’s eyes.

[0221] At 640, if proceeding from element 610, the current frames are analyzed to track the pupils and glints based in part on prior information from the previous frames. At 640, if proceeding from element 630, the tracking state is initialized based on the detected pupils and glints in the current frames. Results of processing at element 640 are checked to verify that the results of tracking or detection can be trusted. For example, results may be checked to determine if the pupil and a sufficient number of glints to perform gaze estimation are successfully tracked or detected in the current frames. At 650, if the results cannot be trusted, then the tracking state is set to NO at element 660, and the method returns to element 610 to process next images of the user’s eyes. At 650, if the results are trusted, then the method proceeds to element 670. At 670, the tracking state is set to YES (if not already YES), and the pupil and glint information is passed to element 680 to estimate the user’s point of gaze.

[0222] Figure 6 is intended to serve as one example of eye tracking technology that may be used in a particular implementation. As recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, other eye tracking technologies that currently exist or are developed in the future may be used in place of or in combination with the glint-assisted eye tracking technology describe herein in the computer system 101 for providing XR experiences to users, in accordance with various embodiments.

[0223] In some embodiments, the captured portions of real-world environment 602 are used to provide a XR experience to the user, for example, a mixed reality environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed over representations of real -world environment 602.

[0224] Thus, the description herein describes some embodiments of three- dimensional environments (e.g., XR environments) that include representations of real-world objects and representations of virtual objects. For example, a three-dimensional environment optionally includes a representation of a table that exists in the physical environment, which is captured and displayed in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., actively via cameras and displays of a computer system, or passively via a transparent or translucent display of the computer system). As described previously, the three-dimensional environment is optionally a mixed reality system in which the three-dimensional environment is based on the physical environment that is captured by one or more sensors of the computer system and displayedvia a display generation component. As a mixed reality system, the computer system is optionally able to selectively display portions and / or objects of the physical environment such that the respective portions and / or objects of the physical environment appear as if they exist in the three-dimensional environment displayed by the computer system. Similarly, the computer system is optionally able to display virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment to appear as if the virtual objects exist in the real world (e.g., physical environment) by placing the virtual objects at respective locations in the three-dimensional environment that have corresponding locations in the real world. For example, the computer system optionally displays a vase such that it appears as if a real vase is placed on top of a table in the physical environment. In some embodiments, a respective location in the three- dimensional environment has a corresponding location in the physical environment. Thus, when the computer system is described as displaying a virtual object at a respective location with respect to a physical object (e.g., such as a location at or near the hand of the user, or at or near a physical table), the computer system displays the virtual object at a particular location in the three-dimensional environment such that it appears as if the virtual object is at or near the physical object in the physical world (e.g., the virtual object is displayed at a location in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to a location in the physical environment at which the virtual object would be displayed if it were a real object at that particular location).

[0225] In some embodiments, real world objects that exist in the physical environment that are displayed in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., and / or visible via the display generation component) can interact with virtual objects that exist only in the three-dimensional environment. For example, a three-dimensional environment can include a table and a vase placed on top of the table, with the table being a view of (or a representation of) a physical table in the physical environment, and the vase being a virtual object.

[0226] In a three-dimensional environment (e.g., a real environment, a virtual environment, or an environment that includes a mix of real and virtual objects), objects are sometimes referred to as having a depth or simulated depth, or objects are referred to as being visible, displayed, or placed at different depths. In this context, depth refers to a dimension other than height or width. In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a fixed set of coordinates (e.g., where a room or an object has a height, depth, and width defined relative to the fixed set of coordinates). In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a location orviewpoint of a user, in which case, the depth dimension varies based on the location of the user and / or the location and angle of the viewpoint of the user. In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to a location of a user that is positioned relative to a surface of an environment (e.g., a floor of an environment, or a surface of the ground), objects that are further away from the user along a line that extends parallel to the surface are considered to have a greater depth in the environment, and / or the depth of an object is measured along an axis that extends outward from a location of the user and is parallel to the surface of the environment (e.g., depth is defined in a cylindrical or substantially cylindrical coordinate system with the position of the user at the center of the cylinder that extends from a head of the user toward feet of the user). In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to viewpoint of a user (e.g., a direction relative to a point in space that determines which portion of an environment that is visible via a head mounted device or other display), objects that are further away from the viewpoint of the user along a line that extends parallel to the direction of the viewpoint of the user are considered to have a greater depth in the environment, and / or the depth of an object is measured along an axis that extends outward from a line that extends from the viewpoint of the user and is parallel to the direction of the viewpoint of the user (e.g., depth is defined in a spherical or substantially spherical coordinate system with the origin of the viewpoint at the center of the sphere that extends outwardly from a head of the user). In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a user interface container (e.g., a window or application in which application and / or system content is displayed) where the user interface container has a height and / or width, and depth is a dimension that is orthogonal to the height and / or width of the user interface container. In some embodiments, in circumstances where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, the height and or width of the container are typically orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to a line that extends from a location based on the user (e.g., a viewpoint of the user or a location of the user) to the user interface container (e.g., the center of the user interface container, or another characteristic point of the user interface container) when the container is placed in the three- dimensional environment or is initially displayed (e.g., so that the depth dimension for the container extends outward away from the user or the viewpoint of the user). In some embodiments, in situations where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, depth of an object relative to the user interface container refers to a position of the object along the depth dimension for the user interface container. In some embodiments, multiple differentcontainers can have different depth dimensions (e.g., different depth dimensions that extend away from the user or the viewpoint of the user in different directions and / or from different starting points). In some embodiments, when depth is defined relative to a user interface container, the direction of the depth dimension remains constant for the user interface container as the location of the user interface container, the user and / or the viewpoint of the user changes (e.g., or when multiple different viewers are viewing the same container in the three-dimensional environment such as during an in-person collaboration session and / or when multiple participants are in a real-time communication session with shared virtual content including the container). In some embodiments, for curved containers (e.g., including a container with a curved surface or curved content region), the depth dimension optionally extends into a surface of the curved container. In some situations, z-separation (e.g., separation of two objects in a depth dimension), z-height (e.g., distance of one object from another in a depth dimension), z-position (e.g., position of one object in a depth dimension), z-depth (e.g., position of one object in a depth dimension), or simulated z dimension (e.g., depth used as a dimension of an object, dimension of an environment, a direction in space, and / or a direction in simulated space) are used to refer to the concept of depth as described above.

[0227] In some embodiments, a user is optionally able to interact with virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment using one or more hands as if the virtual objects were real objects in the physical environment. For example, as described above, one or more sensors of the computer system optionally capture one or more of the hands of the user and display representations of the hands of the user in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., in a manner similar to displaying a real world object in three-dimensional environment described above), or in some embodiments, the hands of the user are visible via the display generation component via the ability to see the physical environment through the user interface due to the transparency / translucency of a portion of the display generation component that is displaying the user interface or due to projection of the user interface onto a transparent / translucent surface or projection of the user interface onto the user’s eye or into a field of view of the user’s eye. Thus, in some embodiments, the hands of the user are displayed at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment and are treated as if they were objects in the three-dimensional environment that are able to interact with the virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment as if they were physical objects in thephysical environment. In some embodiments, the computer system is able to update display of the representations of the user’s hands in the three-dimensional environment in conjunction with the movement of the user’s hands in the physical environment.

[0228] In some of the embodiments described below, the computer system is optionally able to determine the “effective” distance between physical objects in the physical world and virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment, for example, for the purpose of determining whether a physical object is directly interacting with a virtual object (e.g., whether a hand is touching, grabbing, holding, etc. a virtual object or within a threshold distance of a virtual object). For example, a hand directly interacting with a virtual object optionally includes one or more of a finger of a hand pressing a virtual button, a hand of a user grabbing a virtual vase, two fingers of a hand of the user coming together and pinching / holding a user interface of an application, and any of the other types of interactions described here. For example, the computer system optionally determines the distance between the hands of the user and virtual objects when determining whether the user is interacting with virtual objects and / or how the user is interacting with virtual objects. In some embodiments, the computer system determines the distance between the hands of the user and a virtual object by determining the distance between the location of the hands in the three- dimensional environment and the location of the virtual object of interest in the three- dimensional environment. For example, the one or more hands of the user are located at a particular position in the physical world, which the computer system optionally captures and displays at a particular corresponding position in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., the position in the three-dimensional environment at which the hands would be displayed if the hands were virtual, rather than physical, hands). The position of the hands in the three- dimensional environment is optionally compared with the position of the virtual object of interest in the three-dimensional environment to determine the distance between the one or more hands of the user and the virtual object. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally determines a distance between a physical object and a virtual object by comparing positions in the physical world (e.g., as opposed to comparing positions in the three- dimensional environment). For example, when determining the distance between one or more hands of the user and a virtual object, the computer system optionally determines the corresponding location in the physical world of the virtual object (e.g., the position at which the virtual object would be located in the physical world if it were a physical object ratherthan a virtual object), and then determines the distance between the corresponding physical position and the one of more hands of the user. In some embodiments, the same techniques are optionally used to determine the distance between any physical object and any virtual object. Thus, as described herein, when determining whether a physical object is in contact with a virtual object or whether a physical object is within a threshold distance of a virtual object, the computer system optionally performs any of the techniques described above to map the location of the physical object to the three-dimensional environment and / or map the location of the virtual object to the physical environment.

[0229] In some embodiments, the same or similar technique is used to determine where and what the gaze of the user is directed to and / or where and at what a physical stylus held by a user is pointed. For example, if the gaze of the user is directed to a particular position in the physical environment, the computer system optionally determines the corresponding position in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., the virtual position of the gaze), and if a virtual object is located at that corresponding virtual position, the computer system optionally determines that the gaze of the user is directed to that virtual object. Similarly, the computer system is optionally able to determine, based on the orientation of a physical stylus, to where in the physical environment the stylus is pointing. In some embodiments, based on this determination, the computer system determines the corresponding virtual position in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location in the physical environment to which the stylus is pointing, and optionally determines that the stylus is pointing at the corresponding virtual position in the three- dimensional environment.

[0230] Similarly, the embodiments described herein may refer to the location of the user (e.g., the user of the computer system) and / or the location of the computer system in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the user of the computer system is holding, wearing, or otherwise located at or near the computer system. Thus, in some embodiments, the location of the computer system is used as a proxy for the location of the user. In some embodiments, the location of the computer system and / or user in the physical environment corresponds to a respective location in the three-dimensional environment. For example, the location of the computer system would be the location in the physical environment (and its corresponding location in the three-dimensional environment) from which, if a user were to stand at that location facing a respective portion of the physicalenvironment that is visible via the display generation component, the user would see the objects in the physical environment in the same positions, orientations, and / or sizes as they are displayed by or visible via the display generation component of the computer system in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., in absolute terms and / or relative to each other). Similarly, if the virtual objects displayed in the three-dimensional environment were physical objects in the physical environment (e.g., placed at the same locations in the physical environment as they are in the three-dimensional environment, and having the same sizes and orientations in the physical environment as in the three-dimensional environment), the location of the computer system and / or user is the position from which the user would see the virtual objects in the physical environment in the same positions, orientations, and / or sizes as they are displayed by the display generation component of the computer system in the three- dimensional environment (e.g., in absolute terms and / or relative to each other and the real world objects).

[0231] In the present disclosure, various input methods are described with respect to interactions with a computer system. When an example is provided using one input device or input method and another example is provided using another input device or input method, it is to be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilizes the input device or input method described with respect to another example. Similarly, various output methods are described with respect to interactions with a computer system. When an example is provided using one output device or output method and another example is provided using another output device or output method, it is to be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilizes the output device or output method described with respect to another example. Similarly, various methods are described with respect to interactions with a virtual environment or a mixed reality environment through a computer system. When an example is provided using interactions with a virtual environment and another example is provided using mixed reality environment, it is to be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilizes the methods described with respect to another example. As such, the present disclosure discloses embodiments that are combinations of the features of multiple examples, without exhaustively listing all features of an embodiment in the description of each example embodiment.USER INTERFACES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES

[0232] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“LT’) and associated processes that may be implemented on a computer system, such as a portable multifunction device or a head-mounted device, in communication with one or more display generation components, one or more input devices, and optionally one or cameras.

[0233] Figures 7A-7O, Figures 8A-8X, Figures 9A-9P, Figures 10A-10I, and Figures 11 A-l IF include illustrations of three-dimensional environments that are visible via a display generation component (e.g., a display generation component 7100a or a display generation component 120) of a computer system (e.g., computer system 101) and interactions that occur in the three-dimensional environments caused by user inputs directed to the three- dimensional environments and / or inputs received from other computer systems and / or sensors. In some embodiments, an input is directed to a virtual object within a three- dimensional environment by a user’s gaze detected in the region occupied by the virtual object, or by a hand gesture performed at a location in the physical environment that corresponds to the region of the virtual object. In some embodiments, an input is directed to a virtual object within a three-dimensional environment by a hand gesture that is performed (e.g., optionally, at a location in the physical environment that is independent of the region of the virtual object in the three-dimensional environment) while the virtual object has input focus (e.g., while the virtual object has been selected by a concurrently and / or previously detected gaze input, selected by a concurrently or previously detected pointer input, and / or selected by a concurrently and / or previously detected gesture input). In some embodiments, an input is directed to a virtual object within a three-dimensional environment by an input device that has positioned a focus selector object (e.g., a pointer object or selector object) at the position of the virtual object. In some embodiments, an input is directed to a virtual object within a three-dimensional environment via other means (e.g., voice and / or control button). In some embodiments, an input is directed to a representation of a physical object or a virtual object that corresponds to a physical object by the user’s hand movement (e.g., whole hand movement, whole hand movement in a respective posture, movement of one portion of the user’s hand relative to another portion of the hand, and / or relative movement between two hands) and / or manipulation with respect to the physical object (e.g., touching, swiping, tapping, opening, moving toward, and / or moving relative to). In some embodiments, the computer system displays some changes in the three-dimensional environment (e.g.,displaying additional virtual content, ceasing to display existing virtual content, and / or transitioning between different levels of immersion with which visual content is being displayed) in accordance with inputs from sensors (e.g., image sensors, temperature sensors, biometric sensors, motion sensors, and / or proximity sensors) and contextual conditions (e.g., location, time, and / or presence of others in the environment). In some embodiments, the computer system displays some changes in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., displaying additional virtual content, ceasing to display existing virtual content, and / or transitioning between different levels of immersion with which visual content is being displayed) in accordance with inputs from other computers used by other users that are sharing the computer-generated environment with the user of the computer system (e.g., in a shared computer-generated experience, in a shared virtual environment, and / or in a shared virtual or augmented reality environment of a communication session). In some embodiments, the computer system displays some changes in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., displaying movement, deformation, and / or changes in visual characteristics of a user interface, a virtual surface, a user interface object, and / or virtual scenery) in accordance with inputs from sensors that detect movement of other persons and objects and movement of the user that may not qualify as a recognized gesture input for triggering an associated operation of the computer system.

[0234] In some embodiments, a three-dimensional environment that is visible via a display generation component described herein is a virtual three-dimensional environment that includes virtual objects and content at different virtual positions in the three-dimensional environment without a representation of the physical environment. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment is a mixed reality environment that displays virtual objects at different virtual positions in the three-dimensional environment that are constrained by one or more physical aspects of the physical environment (e.g., positions and orientations of walls, floors, surfaces, direction of gravity, time of day, and / or spatial relationships between physical objects). In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment is an augmented reality environment that includes a representation of the physical environment. In some embodiments, the representation of the physical environment includes respective representations of physical objects and surfaces at different positions in the three-dimensional environment, such that the spatial relationships between the different physical objects and surfaces in the physical environment are reflected by the spatial relationships between therepresentations of the physical objects and surfaces in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, when virtual objects are placed relative to the positions of the representations of physical objects and surfaces in the three-dimensional environment, they appear to have corresponding spatial relationships with the physical objects and surfaces in the physical environment. In some embodiments, the computer system transitions between displaying the different types of environments (e.g., transitions between presenting a computer-generated environment or experience with different levels of immersion, adjusting the relative prominence of audio / visual sensory inputs from the virtual content and from the representation of the physical environment) based on user inputs and / or contextual conditions.

[0235] In some embodiments, the display generation component includes a pass- through portion in which the representation of the physical environment is displayed or visible. In some embodiments, the pass-through portion of the display generation component is a transparent or semi-transparent (e.g., see-through) portion of the display generation component revealing at least a portion of a physical environment surrounding and within the field of view of a user (sometimes called “optical passthrough”). For example, the pass- through portion is a portion of a head-mounted display or heads-up display that is made semitransparent (e.g., less than 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, or 5% of opacity) or transparent, such that the user can see through it to view the real world surrounding the user without removing the head-mounted display or moving away from the heads-up display. In some embodiments, the pass-through portion gradually transitions from semi-transparent or transparent to fully opaque when displaying a virtual or mixed reality environment. In some embodiments, the pass-through portion of the display generation component displays a live feed of images or video of at least a portion of physical environment captured by one or more cameras (e.g., rear facing camera(s) of a mobile device or associated with a head-mounted display, or other cameras that feed image data to the computer system) (sometimes called “digital passthrough”). In some embodiments, the one or more cameras point at a portion of the physical environment that is directly in front of the user’s eyes (e.g., behind the display generation component relative to the user of the display generation component). In some embodiments, the one or more cameras point at a portion of the physical environment that is not directly in front of the user’s eyes (e.g., in a different physical environment, or to the side of or behind the user).

[0236] In some embodiments, when displaying virtual objects at positions that correspond to locations of one or more physical objects in the physical environment (e.g., at positions in a virtual reality environment, a mixed reality environment, or an augmented reality environment), at least some of the virtual objects are displayed in place of (e.g., replacing display of) a portion of the live view (e.g., a portion of the physical environment captured in the live view) of the cameras. In some embodiments, at least some of the virtual objects and content are projected onto physical surfaces or empty space in the physical environment and are visible through the pass-through portion of the display generation component (e.g., viewable as part of the camera view of the physical environment, or through the transparent or semi-transparent portion of the display generation component). In some embodiments, at least some of the virtual objects and virtual content are displayed to overlay a portion of the display and block the view of at least a portion of the physical environment visible through the transparent or semi-transparent portion of the display generation component.

[0237] In some embodiments, the display generation component displays different views of the three-dimensional environment in accordance with user inputs or movements that change the virtual position of the viewpoint of the currently displayed view of the three- dimensional environment relative to the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, when the three-dimensional environment is a virtual environment, the viewpoint moves in accordance with navigation or locomotion requests (e.g., in-air hand gestures, and / or gestures performed by movement of one portion of the hand relative to another portion of the hand) without requiring movement of the user’s head, torso, and / or the display generation component in the physical environment. In some embodiments, movement of the user’s head and / or torso, and / or the movement of the display generation component or other location sensing elements of the computer system (e.g., due to the user holding the display generation component or wearing the HMD), relative to the physical environment, cause corresponding movement of the viewpoint (e.g., with corresponding movement direction, movement distance, movement speed, and / or change in orientation) relative to the three-dimensional environment, resulting in corresponding change in the currently displayed view of the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, when a virtual object has a preset spatial relationship relative to the viewpoint (e.g., is anchored or fixed to the viewpoint), movement of the viewpoint relative to the three-dimensionalenvironment would cause movement of the virtual object relative to the three-dimensional environment while the position of the virtual object in the field of view is maintained (e.g., the virtual object is said to be head locked). In some embodiments, a virtual object is body- locked to the user, and moves relative to the three-dimensional environment when the user moves as a whole in the physical environment (e.g., carrying or wearing the display generation component and / or other location sensing component of the computer system), but will not move in the three-dimensional environment in response to the user’ s head movement alone (e.g., the display generation component and / or other location sensing component of the computer system rotating around a fixed location of the user in the physical environment). In some embodiments, a virtual object is, optionally, locked to another portion of the user, such as a user’s hand or a user’s wrist, and moves in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with movement of the portion of the user in the physical environment, to maintain a preset spatial relationship between the position of the virtual object and the virtual position of the portion of the user in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, a virtual object is locked to a preset portion of a field of view provided by the display generation component, and moves in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the movement of the field of view, irrespective of movement of the user that does not cause a change of the field of view.

[0238] In some embodiments, the views of a three-dimensional environment sometimes do not include representation(s) of a user’s hand(s), arm(s), and / or wrist(s). In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 7A-7O, 8A-8X, 9A-9P,10A-10I, and 11A-11F, the representation(s) of a user’s hand(s), arm(s), and / or wrist(s) are included in the views of a three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the representation(s) of a user’s hand(s), arm(s), and / or wrist(s) are included in the views of a three-dimensional environment as part of the representation of the physical environment provided via the display generation component. In some embodiments, the representations are not part of the representation of the physical environment and are separately captured (e.g., by one or more cameras pointing toward the user’s hand(s), arm(s), and wrist(s)) and displayed in the three-dimensional environment independent of the currently displayed view of the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the representation(s) include camera images as captured by one or more cameras of the computer system(s), or stylized versions of the arm(s), wrist(s) and / or hand(s) based on information captured by various sensors). In some embodiments, therepresentation(s) replace display of, are overlaid on, or block the view of, a portion of the representation of the physical environment. In some embodiments, when the display generation component does not provide a view of a physical environment, and provides a completely virtual environment (e.g., no camera view and no transparent pass-through portion), real-time visual representations (e.g., stylized representations or segmented camera images) of one or both arms, wrists, and / or hands of the user are, optionally, still displayed in the virtual environment. In some embodiments, if a representation of the user’s hand is not provided in the view of the three-dimensional environment, the position that corresponds to the user’s hand is optionally indicated in the three-dimensional environment, e.g., by the changing appearance of the virtual content (e.g., through a change in translucency and / or simulated reflective index) at positions in the three-dimensional environment that correspond to the location of the user’s hand in the physical environment. In some embodiments, the representation of the user’s hand or wrist is outside of the currently displayed view of the three-dimensional environment while the virtual position in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location of the user’s hand or wrist is outside of the current field of view provided via the display generation component; and the representation of the user’s hand or wrist is made visible in the view of the three-dimensional environment in response to the virtual position that corresponds to the location of the user’s hand or wrist being moved within the current field of view due to movement of the display generation component, the user’s hand or wrist, the user’s head, and / or the user as a whole.

[0239] Figures 7A-7O illustrate examples of displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport. Figures 12A-12G are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 12000 for displaying a user interface element while a volumetric application is displayed in the viewport. The user interfaces in Figures 7B-7O are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 12A-12G.

[0240] Figure 7A illustrates an example physical environment 7000 that includes a user 7002 interacting with a computer system 101. Computer system 101 is worn on a head of the user 7002 (e.g., sometimes referred to as the user 7002’ s head) and typically positioned in front of user 7002. In Figure 7A, user 7002’ s left hand 7020 and right hand 7022 are free to interact with computer system 101. Physical environment 7000 includes a physical object 7014, physical walls 7004 and 7006, and a physical floor 7008. As shown in the examples in Figures 7B-7O, display generation component 7100a of computer system 101 is a head-mounted display (HMD) worn on user 7002’ s head (e.g., what is shown in Figures 7A-7O as being visible via display generation component 7100a of computer system 101 corresponds to user 7002 ’s viewport into an environment when wearing a head-mounted display).

[0241] In some embodiments, the head mounted display (HMD) 7100a includes one or more displays that display a representation of a portion of the three-dimensional environment 7000’ that corresponds to the perspective of the user. While an HMD typically includes multiple displays including a display for a right eye and a separate display for a left eye that display slightly different images to generate user interfaces with stereoscopic depth, in Figures 7B-7O, a single image is shown that corresponds to the image for a single eye and depth information is indicated with other annotations or description of the figures. In some embodiments, HMD 7100a includes one or more sensors (e.g., one or more interior- and / or exterior-facing image sensors 314), such as sensor 7101a, sensor 7101b and / or sensor 7101c (Figure 7B) for detecting a state of the user, including facial and / or eye tracking of the user (e.g., using one or more inward-facing sensors 7101a and / or 7101b) and / or tracking hand, torso, or other movements of the user (e.g., using one or more outward-facing sensors 7101c). In some embodiments, HMD 7100a includes one or more input devices that are optionally located on a housing of HMD 7100a, such as one or more buttons, trackpads, touchscreens, scroll wheels, digital crowns that are rotatable and depressible or other input devices. In some embodiments, input elements are mechanical input elements; in some embodiments, input elements are solid state input elements that respond to press inputs based on detected pressure or intensity. For example, in Figures 7B-7O, HMD 7100a includes one or more of button 701, button 702 and digital crown 703 for providing inputs to HMD 7100a. It will be understood that additional and / or alternative input devices may be included in HMD 7100a.

[0242] In some embodiments, the display generation component of computer system 101 is a touchscreen held by user 7002. In some embodiments, the display generation component is a standalone display, a projector, or another type of display. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more input devices, including cameras or other sensors and input devices that detect movement of the user’s hand(s), movement of the user’s body as whole, and / or movement of the user’s head in the physical environment. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices detect the movement and the current postures, orientations, and positions of the user’s hand(s), face, and / or body as a whole. For example, in some embodiments, while the user’s hand 7020(e.g., a left hand) is within the field of view of the one or more sensors of HMD 7100a (e.g., within the viewport of the user), a representation of the user’s hand 7020’ is displayed in the user interface displayed (e.g., as a passthrough representation and / or as a virtual representation of the user’s hand 7020) on the display of HMD 7100a. In some embodiments, while the user’s hand 7022 (e.g., a right hand) is within the field of view of the one or more sensors of HMD 7100a (e.g., within the viewport of the user), a representation of the user’s hand 7022’ is displayed in the user interface displayed (e.g., as a passthrough representation and / or as a virtual representation of the user’s hand 7022) on the display of HMD 7100a. In some embodiments, the user’s hand 7020 and / or the user’s hand 7022 are used to perform one or more gestures (e.g., one or more air gestures), optionally in combination with a gaze input. In some embodiments, the one or more gestures performed with the user’s hand(s) 7020 and / or 7022 include a direct air gesture input that is based on a position of the representation of the user’s hand(s) 7020’ and / or 7022’ displayed within the user interface on the display of HMD 7100a. For example, a direct air gesture input is determined as being directed to a user interface object displayed at a position that intersects with the displayed position of the representation of the user’s hand(s) 7020’ and / or 7022’ in the user interface. In some embodiments, the one or more gestures performed with the user’s hand(s) 7020 and / or 7022 include an indirect air gesture input that is based on a virtual object displayed at a position that corresponds to a position at which the user’s attention is currently detected (e.g., and / or is optionally not based on a position of the representation of the user’s hand(s) 7020’ and / or 7022’ displayed within the user interface). For example, an indirect air gesture is performed with respect to a user interface object while detecting the user’s attention (e.g., based on gaze or other indication of user attention) on the user interface object, such as a gaze and pinch (e.g., or other gesture performed with the user’s hand).

[0243] In some embodiments, user inputs are detected via a touch-sensitive surface or touchscreen. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include an eye tracking component that detects location and movement of the user’s gaze. In some embodiments, the display generation component, and optionally, the one or more input devices and the computer system, are parts of a head-mounted device that moves and rotates with the user’s head in the physical environment, and changes the viewpoint of the user in the three- dimensional environment provided via the display generation component. In some embodiments, the display generation component is a heads-up display that does not move orrotate with the user’s head or the user’s body as a whole, but, optionally, changes the viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the movement of the user’s head or body relative to the display generation component. In some embodiments, the display generation component (e.g., a touchscreen) is optionally moved and rotated by the user’s hand relative to the physical environment or relative to the user’s head, and changes the viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the movement of the display generation component relative to the user’s head or face or relative to the physical environment.

[0244] In some embodiments, one or more portions of the view of physical environment 7000 that is visible to user 7002 via display generation component 7100a are digital passthrough portions that include representations of corresponding portions of physical environment 7000 captured via one or more image sensors of computer system 101. In some embodiments, one or more portions of the view of physical environment 7000 that is visible to user 7002 via display generation component 7100a are optical passthrough portions, in that user 7002 can see one or more portions of physical environment 7000 through one or more transparent or semi-transparent portions of display generation component 7100a.

[0245] Figure 7B illustrates a view of a three-dimensional environment (e.g., corresponding at least partially to the physical environment 7000 in Figure 7A) that is visible to the user 7002 via HMD 7100a of the computer system 101. The three-dimensional environment includes an application user interface 7030 that displays three-dimensional application content including one or more user interface elements having a non-zero length, non-zero width, and non-zero depth. The three-dimensional application content elements of the application user interface 7030 are enclosed within (e.g., bounded by) a three-dimensional volume (e.g., having a horizontal, a vertical and / or a depth dimension; and / or a radial and / or an azimuthal dimension), demarcated by a three-dimensional outline 7034 that is optionally not displayed to the user 7002. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 displays a portion of the outline 7034 (e.g., visually indicating a lower horizontal boundary of the three- dimensional application volume) while attention of the user 7002 is directed to one or more regions of the application user interface 7030, and / or while the user 7002 performs operations on the application user interface 7030, as described with reference to Figures 8A-8X. In some embodiments, one or more of the three-dimensional application content elements within theapplication user interface 7030 are responsive to user input. For example, the three- dimensional application content elements may be interactive elements. In some embodiments, the user 7002 is enabled to perform operations (e.g., a searching function) within the three- dimensional application content, and / or enabled to manipulate one or more user interface elements within the three-dimensional application content. In some embodiments, the user 7002 may be immersed in and / or be surrounded by the three-dimensional application content elements of the application user interface 7030. In the example of Figure 7B, the outline 7034 of the application user interface 7030 has a cylindrical shape (e.g., a hollow cylinder that encloses the three-dimensional application content elements) within which the application user interface 7030 displays a number of buildings, a park, and a number of informational pins or alerts. A move affordance 7032 associated with the application user interface 7030 is optionally displayed (e.g., independently of attention of the user 7002). Top view 7036 shows the viewpoint 7002’ of the user 7002 at a threshold distance Dth (e.g., 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120 cm or another distance threshold) from the application user interface 7030.

[0246] Figure 7C illustrates an example transition from Figure 7B. In response to detecting an event (e.g., a system-generated event or an application-generated event, optionally an event generated in response to a user input from the user 7002) while the application user interface 7030 is displayed in the viewport of the user 7002, and in accordance with a determination that a position of the user 7002 within the three-dimensional environment when the event was detected is at or more than a threshold distance Dth from a characteristic portion of the application user interface 7030 (e.g., a portion of on the outline 7034 of the application user interface 7030, a portion of the application user interface 7030 closest to the user, a portion of the application user interface 7030 towards which the attention of the user 7002 is directed, and / or that optionally intersects the outline 7034), the computer system 101 displays a first user interface element 7038 at a respective distance from a boundary of the application user interface 7030 (e.g., at or near the boundary, tangential to and / or on an exterior surface of the outline 7034), on a first side of the boundary (e.g., on or outside of the boundary). In some embodiments, application user interface 7030 is visually deemphasized relative to the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., by increasing a degree of blurring, decreasing a brightness, decreasing a saturation, decreasing visual intensity, decreasing a contrast, decreasing an opacity, and / or other visual deemphasis) due to the computer system 101 displaying the first user interface element 7038.

[0247] In some embodiments, the first user interface element 7038 includes a first content item 7040 and a second content item 7042. In some embodiments, the first user interface element 7038 includes only the first content item 7040. In some embodiments, the first content item 7040 and / or the second content item 7042 include one or more selectable user interface elements (e.g., buttons, check-boxes, and / or other elements) for performing respective operations (e.g., dismissing the first user interface element 7038, accepting an incoming communication request, and / or other operations).

[0248] In some embodiments, an orientation of the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., represented by a vector 7039 that is parallel to a plane of the first user interface element 7038) is parallel to an edge 7041 (e.g., a vertical dimension) of the outline 7034. Figure 7C also illustrates an alternative placement 7044 of the first user interface element 7038 if the user 7002 were to move leftwards as illustrated in top view 7046 to a second position 7048 within the three-dimensional environment, or if the user 7002 had been at the second position 7048 when the event triggering display of the first user interface element 7038 was detected. As Figure 7C illustrates the viewport of the user 7002 while the user 7002 faces the wall 7004’, the alternative placement 7044 of the first user interface element 7038 is illustrated from the perspective of that viewport (e.g., whereas the user 7002 at the second position 7048 would be presented with the first user interface element 7038 at the alternative placement 7044 being substantially perpendicular to the user 7002’ s viewpoint).

[0249] Figure 7D illustrates an alternative scenario to Figure 7C. In response to detecting an event (e.g., a system-generated event or an application-generated event, optionally in response to user input from the user 7002) while the application user interface 7030 is displayed in the viewport of the user 7002, and in accordance with a determination that a distance 7037 of the viewpoint of the user 7002 from the characteristic portion of the application user interface 7030 when the event was detected is less than the threshold distance Dth, the computer system 101 displays the first user interface element 7038 within the three-dimensional application volume of the application user interface 7030 (e.g., the first user interface element 7038 is in some circumstances pushed in depth, away from the viewpoint of the user, with respect to the application user interface 7030 compared to the position of the first user interface element 7038 illustrated in Figure 7B) to maintain the threshold distance Dth between the viewpoint of the user 7002 and the first user interface element 7038, optionally while visually deemphasizing application content of the applicationuser interface 7030. For example, the user 7002 may have moved their viewpoint closer to the application user interface 7030 within the three-dimensional environment between the viewport illustrated in Figure 7B and the viewport illustrated in Figure 7D (or the user 7002 may have moved the application user interface 7030 toward the viewpoint of the user 7002, optionally without changing a location of the user 7002 within the three-dimensional environment). Top view 7054 shows that the first user interface element 7038 is displayed within the three-dimensional application volume of the application user interface 7030, at the threshold distance Dth away from the viewpoint 7002’ of the user 7002.

[0250] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that displaying the first user interface element 7038 within the three-dimensional application volume of the application user interface 7030 (e.g., at the threshold distance Dth from the viewpoint of the user 7002) causes a spatial conflict between the first user interface element 7038 and one or more application content elements (e.g., two-dimensional content elements, and / or three- dimensional content elements) of the application user interface 7030 (e.g., one or more portions of the first user interface element 7038 and one or more portions of application content of the application user interface 7030 would have been displayed at the same location in the three-dimensional environment, and / or one or more portions of the first user interface element 7038 would have been blocked from the viewpoint of the user 7002 by one or more portions of the application content elements of the application user interface 7030 if attention of the user 7002 were to be directed toward the first user interface element 7038), computer system 101 changes one or more visual properties (e.g., a visual intensity, an opacity, a degree of blurring, a contrast, and / or other visual properties) of the application content elements of the application user interface 7030 that spatially conflict with the first user interface element 7038, to increase a visibility of the first user interface element 7038 from the viewpoint of the user 7002. As illustrated in Figure 7D, region 7050 and region 7052 represent portions of the application content of the application user interface 7030 that spatially conflict with the first user interface element 7038. By changing the one or more visual properties of the application content elements of the application user interface 7030 or at least of region 7050 and region 7052, the visibility of the first user interface element 7038 is increased, with respect to the viewpoint of the user 7002. Details about how the computer system 101 changes one or more visual properties of application content to reduce and / or resolve spatial conflicts are described with reference to Figures 11 A-l IF.

[0251] In some embodiments, an orientation of the first user interface element 7038 is based on an orientation of one or more affordances associated with the application user interface 7030 (e.g., the move affordance 7032). Details about how the computer system 101 displays the one or more affordances associated with the application user interface 7030 based on a viewpoint of the user 7002 are described with reference to Figures 10A-10I. For example, a plane on which the information of the first user interface element 7038 is displayed may be parallel to a plane of the move affordance 7032 that faces the viewpoint of the user.

[0252] Figure 7E illustrates an application user interface 7056 that also displays three-dimensional application content elements. The three-dimensional application content elements of the application user interface 7056 are enclosed within (e.g., bounded by) a three- dimensional volume (e.g., having a horizontal, a vertical and / or a depth dimension; and / or a radial and / or an azimuthal dimension) having a cuboidal shape (e.g., a hollow rectangular prism), demarcated by an outline 7058 that is optionally not displayed to the user 7002. The application user interface 7056 displays a number of buildings within the outline 7058. A move affordance 7060 associated with the application user interface 7056 is optionally displayed (e.g., independently of attention of the user 7002). Figure 7E also illustrates that, in response to detecting an event (e.g., a system-generated event or an application-generated event, optionally in response to a user input from the user 7002) while the application user interface 7056 is displayed in the viewport of the user 7002, and in accordance with a determination that a position of the user 7002 is at least the threshold distance Dth from the application user interface 7056, the computer system 101 displays the first user interface element 7038 having the first content item 7040 and the second content item 7042 at a boundary of the application user interface 7056 (e.g., parallel to a surface of the outline 7058). Top view 7062 shows the user 7002 in front of the application user interface 7056, and the first user interface element 7038 is displayed on a front surface of the application user interface 7056. In some embodiments, an orientation of the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., represented by the vector 7039 that is parallel to a plane of the first user interface element 7038) is parallel to an edge 7068 (e.g., a vertical dimension) of the outline 7058. In some embodiments, application user interface 7056 is visually deemphasized relative to the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., by increasing a degree of blurring, decreasing a brightness, decreasing a saturation, decreasing visual intensity, decreasing a contrast,decreasing an opacity, and / or other visual deemphasis) due to the computer system 101 displaying the first user interface element 7038. Figure 7E also illustrates an alternative placement 7064 of the first user interface element 7038 if the user 7002 had been positioned at or were to move leftwards to a second position 7066 within the three-dimensional environment as illustrated in top view 7062. Like Figure 7C, the alternative placement 7064 of the first user interface element 7038 is illustrated from the perspective of the viewport while the viewpoint of the user 7002 faces the wall 7004’, (e.g., whereas the first user interface element 7038 at the alternative placement 7064 would have been presented to the user 7002 at the second position 7066 as being substantially perpendicular to the user 7002’s viewpoint). Thus, as illustrated with reference to Figures 7C and 7E, while the outline 7034 and the outline 7058 may not be visible to the user 7002, the shape or contour of the respective outlines determines the location and / or orientation at which the first user interface element 7038 is displayed in response to the computer system 101 detecting the occurrence of the event. For example, the first user interface element 7038 at the alternative placement 7064 is still parallel to the original placement of the first user interface element 7038 in the viewport illustrated in Figure 7E (e.g., due to the rectangular shape of the outline 7058), whereas the first user interface element 7038 at the alternative placement 7044 is not parallel to the original placement of the first user interface element 7038 in the viewport illustrated in Figure 7C (e.g., due to the cylindrical shape of the outline 7034).

[0253] Figure 7F illustrates an alternative placement of the first user interface element 7038. In response to detecting an event (e.g., a system-generated event or an applicationgenerated event, optionally in response to user input from the user 7002) while the application user interface 7030 is displayed in the viewport of the user 7002, the computer system 101 displays the first user interface element 7038 having the first content item 7040 and the second content item 7042 at a characteristic portion (e.g., at a centroid of the three- dimensional application volume, at a center of the three-dimensional application, and / or at a threshold distance from the outline 7034) within the three-dimensional application volume of the application user interface 7030, regardless of the distance, in the three-dimensional environment, between the application user interface 7030 and the viewpoint of the user 7002. Top view 7070 shows the first user interface element 7038 displayed at the same characteristic position within the application user interface 7030 whether the viewpoint of the user 7002 is at a first position closer to the application user interface 7030 (optionally greaterthan the threshold distance Dth), or at a second position further from the application user interface 7030 (optionally greater than the threshold distance Dth). In some embodiments, an orientation of the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., represented by the vector 7039 that is parallel to the plane of the first user interface element 7038) is parallel to the edge 7041 of the outline 7034.

[0254] Figures 7G-7I illustrate how the first user interface element 7038 scales based on a distance, in the three-dimensional environment, between the application user interface 7030 and the viewpoint of the user 7002. Figure 7G shows the application user interface 7030 displayed within the viewport at a greater distance away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 than the application user interface 7030 shown in Figure 7C. In order to maintain legibility of the information displayed on the first user interface element 7038, the computer system 101 enlarges the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., relative to the size of the application user interface 7030, compared to the size of the first user interface element 7038 displayed in Figure 7C) that is displayed at the boundary of the application volume of the application user interface 7030, which is positioned further from the user 7002 (e.g., with respect to the application user interface 7030 displayed in Figure 7C). In some embodiments, Figure 7G illustrates an example transition from Figure 7C.

[0255] For example, Figure 7G illustrates an example transition from Figure 7C if, while the first user interface element 7038 was displayed in the viewport (Figure 7C), the user 7002 provided a user input (e.g., an air pinch gesture followed by a movement in depth away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 while attention of the user 7002 is directed toward the move affordance 7032) to move the application user interface 7030 in depth, away from a viewpoint of the user 7002. In some embodiments, the application user interface 7030 is a fixed scale application that does not change in size based on the distance between the viewpoint of the user 7002 and the application user interface 7030. For example, the reduction in size of the application user interface 7030 shown in the viewport illustrated in Figure 7G is due to the application user interface 7030 being further from the viewpoint of the user 7002. In some embodiments, the first user interface element 7038 is a dynamically scaled user interface element, described in greater detail with respect to Figures 9A-9P. Top view 7072 shows a position 7074 of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7C and a position 7076 of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7G, the application user interface 7030 maintaining the same size at the position 7074 and the position 7076.

[0256] Figure 7H shows the application user interface 7030 displayed within the viewport at a position within the three-dimensional environment that is closer to the viewpoint of the user 7002 than the application user interface 7030 shown in Figure 7C. Top view 7078 shows the position 7074 of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7C and a position 7080 of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7H, the application user interface 7030 maintaining the same size at the position 7074 and the position 7080. The computer system 101 decreases a size of the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., relative to the size of the application user interface 7030, compared to the size of the first user interface element 7038 displayed in Figure 7C) that is displayed at the boundary of the application volume of the application user interface 7030, which is positioned closer to the viewpoint of the user 7002 (e.g., with respect to the application user interface 7030 displayed in Figure 7C). In some embodiments, Figure 7H illustrates an example transition from Figure 7C in response to the user 7002 providing a user input (e.g., an air pinch gesture followed by a movement in depth toward the viewpoint of the user 7002 while attention of the user 7002 is directed toward the move affordance 7032) to move the application user interface 7030 in depth, toward the viewpoint of the user 7002 while the first user interface element 7038 is displayed in the viewport (Figure 7C).

[0257] Figure 71 illustrates the variation in size of the first user interface element 7038 based on a distance, in the three-dimensional environment, between the application user interface 7030 and the viewpoint of the user 7002. A top view 7082-1 is analogous to top view 7046. The application user interface 7030 is further away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 in a top view 7082-2 than in the top view 7082-1 (e.g., as represented by the dashed outline indicating, for comparison, the position 7074 of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7C). In the top view 7082-2, the computer system 101 has enlarged the first user interface element 7038 to maintain legibility of the information displayed thereon. The shaded portion of the first user interface element 7038 in the top view 7050-2 corresponds to, and indicates for comparison, the smaller size of the first user interface element 7038 shown in the top view 7082-1.

[0258] In a top view 7082-3, the application user interface 7030 is further away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 than in the top view 7082-2. In the top view 7082-3, the computer system 101 has continued to enlarge the first user interface element 7038 to maintain legibility of the information displayed thereon. The shaded portion of the first userinterface element 7038 in the top view 7082-3 corresponds to, and indicates for comparison, the smaller size of the first user interface element 7038 shown in the top view 7082-2. Similarly, the application user interface 7030 is further away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 in a top view 7082-4 than in the top view 7082-3. Due to the first user interface element 7038 reaching a maximum size in the top view 7082-3, even though the application user interface 7030 is still further from the viewpoint of the user 7002 in the top view 7082-4 than in the top view 7082-3, the first user interface element 7038 remains at the same size in the top view 7082-4 as in the top view 7082-3.

[0259] In a top view 7082-5, the application user interface 7030 is closer to the viewpoint of the user 7002 than in the top view 7082-1. In the top view 7082-5, the computer system 101 has decreased the size of the first user interface element 7038 with respect to the top view 7082-1. In a top view 7082-6, the application user interface 7030 is moved even closer to the viewpoint of the user 7002 than in the top view 7082-5. Due to the first user interface element 7038 reaching a minimum size in the top view 7082-5, even though the application user interface 7030 is closer to the viewpoint of the user 7002 in the top view 7082-6 than in the top view 7082-5, the first user interface element 7038 remains at the same size in the top view 7082-6 as in the top view 7082-5.

[0260] Figure 7J illustrates an application user interface 7082 that also displays three- dimensional application content elements enclosed within (e.g., bounded by) a three- dimensional volume, demarcated by an outline 7084 that is optionally not displayed to the user 7002. For example, the outline 7084 of the application user interface 7082 has a cylindrical shape (e.g., a hollow cylinder that encloses the three-dimensional application content) that encloses a three-dimensional representation of a chair 7086. A move affordance 7088 associated with the application user interface 7082 is optionally displayed (e.g., independently of attention of the user 7002). A planar section 7092 (e.g., a circular, an oval, an elliptical, a quadrilateral, polygonal, or a two-dimensional section of another three- dimensional shape) of the application user interface 7082, shown in top view 7090 has a dimension (e.g., a linear length) that is small enough such that the computer system 101 displays the first user interface element 7038 at a location on a back boundary of the application user interface 7082 to maintain the requisite threshold distance Dth from the viewpoint of the user 7002, or at best to maximize the distance between the first user interface element 7038 and the viewpoint of the user 7002. Top view 7090 also shows theposition 7074 of the application user interface 7030 at the size and location illustrated in top view 7046 (Figure 7C) for comparison. In some embodiments, application user interface 7082 is visually deemphasized relative to the first user interface element 7038 (e.g., by increasing a degree of blurring, decreasing a brightness, decreasing a saturation, decreasing visual intensity, decreasing a contrast, decreasing an opacity, and / or other visual deemphasis) due to the computer system 101 displaying the first user interface element 7038.

[0261] Figure 7K illustrates the first user interface element 7038 being displayed at an orientation that is at least partially based on a direction of the attention of the user 7002. Side view 7094 shows that the head of the user 7002 is lowered relative to a horizon 7096, as the attention of the user is directed toward (e.g., by gazing at) the first user interface element 7038. The horizon 7096 represents a fixed horizontal reference plane in the three-dimensional environment that is at an eye level of the user 7002 (e.g., typically when the user 7002 is in an upright or standing position, and even though the gaze, or proxy for gaze, of the user 7002 and / or head may be pointed in a direction other than horizontally) and that does not change with changes in the head elevation of the user 7002 (e.g., head elevation pointing up, or head elevation pointing down, and / or without vertical or other translational movement of the head of the user 7002). As illustrated in side view 7094, lowering of the head of the user 7002 results in a head direction 7098 (e.g., corresponding to the attention) that is at a head angle 0 with respect to the horizon 7096. In contrast to orienting the first user interface element 7038 such that the vector 7039 is parallel to an edge of the application volume of the application user interface (e.g., edge 7041 of the application user interface 7030, as illustrated in Figure 7C), the vector 7039 of the first user interface element 7038 is oriented at an intermediate angle between being perpendicular to the viewpoint of the user 7002 (e.g., denoted by the perpendicular line 7100) and being parallel to an edge 7102 of the application volume 7104. In some embodiments, the application volume 7104 includes one or more user interface elements (e.g., alerts, billboards, and / or other two- or three-dimensional displays of information) that are oriented parallel to the edge 7102 of the application volume 7104. For example, an alert 7106 is oriented parallel to the edge 7102 of the application volume 7104. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the attention of the user 7002 being directed toward the alert 7106, the computer system tilts the alert 7106 toward a viewpoint of the user 7002 (e.g., from being angled substantially parallel to the vector 7039 to being angled more toward the perpendicular line 7100).

[0262] Figures 7L-7O illustrate two different types of behavior of the first user interface element 7038 in response to detecting a change of a viewpoint of the user 7002 (e.g., due to the viewpoint of the user 7002 moving around in the three-dimensional environment, and / or due to the user 7002 changing where their attention is directed within the three-dimensional environment) while the first user interface element 7038 is displayed in the viewport. Figures 7L-7M illustrate the first user interface element 7038 being a viewpoint- locked virtual object. The viewport illustrated in Figure 7L is analogous to the viewport of Figure 7C, and top view 7108 is analogous to top view 7046.

[0263] Figure 7M shows an example transition from Figure 7L, in which the viewpoint of the user 7002 moves to the right, closer to the sphere 7014’. In accordance with the first user interface element 7038 being a viewpoint-locked virtual object, and in response to detecting the rightward movement of the viewpoint of the user 7002, the computer system 101 maintains the display of the first user interface element 7038 at the same position within (e.g., relative to) the viewport of the user 7002, while updating other portions of the viewport based on the new location of the viewpoint of the user 7002 in the three-dimensional environment. As a result, the first user interface element 7038 is displayed near a right boundary of the application user interface 7030 in Figure 7M. Top view 7110 shows that the first user interface element 7038 remains displayed in front of the user 7002 after the rightward movement of the viewpoint of the user 7002.

[0264] Figures 7N-7O illustrate the first user interface element 7038 as an environment-locked virtual object. The viewport illustrated in Figure 7N is analogous to the viewport of Figure 7C except for the first user interface element 7038 being displayed above the application user interface 7030, in an environment-locked fashion. Figure 70 shows an example transition from Figure 7N, in which the viewpoint of the user 7002 moves to the right, closer to the sphere 7014’. In accordance with the first user interface element 7038 being an environment-locked virtual object, the computer system 101 maintains display of the first user interface element 7038 at the same location within the three-dimensional environment, such that the first user interface element 7038 appears to have shifted to the left in the viewport illustrated in Figure 70 as a result of the rightward movement of the viewpoint of the user 7002. Top view 7112 in Figure 7N shows that the first user interface element 7038 is displayed to the right of the viewpoint of the user 7002, whereas top view 7114 in Figure 70 shows that the first user interface element 7038 remains at the samelocation within the three-dimensional environment and thus is now positioned to the left of the viewpoint of the user 7002 due to the rightward movement of the viewpoint of the user 7002.

[0265] Additional descriptions regarding Figures 7B-7O are provided below with reference to method 12000 described with respect to Figures 12A-12G.

[0266] Figures 8A-8V illustrate examples of displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application. Figures 13A- 13G are flow diagrams of an exemplary method 13000 for displaying visual feedback when attention of the user is directed toward a boundary of a volumetric application. The user interfaces in Figures 8A-8V are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 13A-13G.

[0267] Figure 8A illustrates a view of a three-dimensional environment (e.g., corresponding at least partially to the physical environment 7000 in Figure 7A) that is visible to the user 7002 via HMD 7100a of the computer system 101. The three-dimensional environment includes an application user interface 8002 of a volumetric application that displays three-dimensional application content including one or more user interface elements having a non-zero length, non-zero width, and non-zero depth. For example, the application user interface 8002 displays a chair 8004 having a chair back 8006, a chair seat 8008 and four chair legs 8010. A move affordance 8014 associated with the application user interface 8002 is optionally displayed (e.g., independently of attention 8016 of the user 7002, or in response to detecting that the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed to a portion (e.g., a central portion) of the application user interface). Figure 8 A illustrates the attention 8016 of the user being directed toward an inner region of the chair 8004, between the chair back 8006 and the chair seat 8008, away from a boundary (e.g., top, bottom, left, or right) of the three- dimensional application content (e.g., chair 8004). In response to detecting that the attention 8016 of the user 7002 (e.g., based on gaze of the user 7002 or a proxy for gaze) is directed toward a portion of the three-dimensional application content that is more than a threshold distance from a boundary of the three-dimensional application content (e.g., 5%, 10%, 20%, 30% or another percentage of a linear length (e.g., width, height and / or depth) of the three- dimensional application content), the computer system 101 forgoes displaying the boundary of the three-dimensional application content and / or forgoes displaying any additional visualindicators associated with the boundary of the three-dimensional application content. Top view 8018 shows the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the application user interface 8002.

[0268] Figure 8B illustrates that, in response to detecting that the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward a first portion 8020 of the boundary of the three-dimensional application content (e.g., a lower right boundary, toward a lower end of the front right leg of the chair 8004), the computer system 101 visually emphasizes (e.g., highlighting with increased color, brightness, opacity, or making visible if previously not visible, hereinafter also sometimes used interchangeably referred as increasing the visual prominence by decreasing a degree of blurring, increasing a brightness, increasing a saturation, increasing visual intensity, increasing a contrast, increasing an opacity, and / or other visual emphasis) the first portion 8020 of a baseplate 8021, denoted with dotted lines to indicate other portions of the baseplate 8021 that are not visible in Figure 8B. In some embodiments, the baseplate8021 confines three-dimensional content of the application user interface 8002 to a three- dimensional volume above the baseplate 8021 (e.g., a baseplate defines the bottom planar boundary of a three-dimensional volume). In some embodiments, the computer system 101 visually emphasizes the first portion 8020 (e.g., a front right quadrant) of the baseplate 8021 and forgoes visually emphasizing (and / or visually deemphasizes) other portions (e.g., a front left quadrant, and / or a back half) of the baseplate 8021 in accordance with a determination that the attention 8016 is directed toward a region closer to the first portion 8020 than a second portion (e.g., adjacent to the first portion 8020). In some embodiments, computer system 101 maintains display of the move affordance 8014 in conjunction with visually emphasizing the first portion 8020 (or ceases display of the move affordance 8014 and visually emphasizes the first portion 8020). In some embodiments, the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 does not fill an entire region within the viewport (e.g., does not fill a horizontal plane in the viewport, or does not fill a planar region in the viewport). For example, no application content of the application user interface 8002 is displayed between the four chair legs 8010 in a horizontal plane defined by the ends of the four chair legs 8010. In some embodiments, displaying the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021 guides the user 7002 toward one or more affordances (e.g., a resize affordance) associated with the application user interface 8002, as described below. Top view8022 shows an outline of the baseplate 8021 and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016toward a boundary of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002.

[0269] Figure 8C illustrates an example transition from Figure 8B. Based on the attention 8016 of the user 7002 remaining within a vicinity of (e.g., remaining on, or moving to another region within) the first portion 8020 for a threshold period of time (optionally before the attention 8016 is directed toward a resize affordance 8024), the computer system 101 displays the resize affordance 8024, optionally by transitioning from displaying the move affordance 8014 to displaying the resize affordance 8024 (e.g., by morphing the move affordance 8014, optionally via an animation, into the resize affordance 8024 and / or ceasing to display the move affordance 8014). In some embodiments, computer system 101 further visually emphasizes an edge 8026 of the first portion 8020 (e.g., represented by the three crosses). Top view 8028 shows the resize affordance 8024 displayed prior to the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the resize affordance 8024.

[0270] Figure 8D illustrates an example transition from Figure 8C. Based on the attention 8016 of the user 7002 moving toward a region 8030 surrounding the resize affordance 8024 for selecting the resize affordance 8024 (optionally remaining for a threshold period of time), the computer system 101 visually emphasizes the resize affordance 8024. Optionally, computer system 101 maintains the visual emphasis on the edge 8026 of the first portion 8020 in conjunction with visually emphasizing the resize affordance 8024. Top view 8032 shows the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the region 8030.

[0271] Figure 8E illustrates an example transition from Figure 8D. Top view 8034 shows the outline of the baseplate 8021 and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward a central portion of the baseplate 8021. Based on the attention 8016 of the user 7002 moving to the left along the edge 8026, away from the resize affordance 8024, by a threshold distance that is larger than the region 8030, the computer system 101 ceases display of the resize affordance 8024 (optionally while maintaining the visual emphasis on the edge 8026 of the first portion 8020). In some embodiments, requiring that the attention 8016 move by an amount that is larger than the region 8030 before the computer system 101 ceases display of the resize affordance 8024 helps to prevent inadvertent dismissal and / or flickering of the resize affordance 8024 when the attention 8016 moves near a boundary of the region 8030.Optionally, computer system 101 redisplays the move affordance 8014 in conjunction with ceasing to display the resize affordance 8024.

[0272] Figure 8F illustrates that, in response to detecting that the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward an edge of a second portion 8036 of the boundary of the three- dimensional application content (e.g., a lower left boundary, toward lower ends of the left legs of the chair 8004), the computer system 101 visually emphasizes the second portion 8036 of the baseplate 8021 and displays the resize affordance 8024 to the left of the second portion 8036. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 forgoes visually emphasizing other portions (e.g., the first portion 8020) of the baseplate 8021 in accordance with a determination that the attention 8016 is directed toward a region closer to the second portion 8036 than the first portion 8020. In some embodiments, the second portion 8036 of the baseplate 8021 is adjacent to (e.g., contiguous with) the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021. Top view 8038 shows the outline of the baseplate 8021, the resize affordance 8024, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward a left portion of the baseplate 8021.

[0273] Figures 8G-8K show how the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 is resized, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 8G illustrates a user input that includes the hand 7022 performing an air pinch gesture 8500-1 (e.g., including bringing two fingers into contact) while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward the resize affordance 8024 (e.g., an example transition from Figure 8D). In response to detecting the air pinch gesture 8500-1 while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward the resize affordance 8024, the computer system 101 displays additional portions of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., all of the baseplate 8021 including both the first portion 8020 and the second portion 8036) to visually indicate that the application user interface 8002 is receiving a resizing input and to visually indicate a spatial extent of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 to the user 7002. The user input further includes movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 (e.g., after the two fingers are brought into contact, and while this contact is maintained, hand 7022 of user 7002 moves by more than a threshold movement amount) away from a viewpoint of the user 7002. Top view 8040 shows the baseplate 8021, the resize affordance 8024, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the resize affordance 8024.

[0274] Figure 8H illustrates an example transition from Figure 8G. Based on detecting the movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 (Figure 8G), the computer system 101 resizes the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 by reducing a size of the chair 8004. Conversely, were the movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 toward the viewpoint of the user 7002 (e.g., in a different direction, such as an opposite direction, from the direction of movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 shown in Figure 8G), the computer system 101 would enlarge a size of the chair 8004. In response to detecting the release of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 while the attention 8016 is directed toward a central portion of the baseplate 8021, the computer system 101 ceases display of the resize affordance 8024 and transitions to displaying the move affordance 8014, while displaying a resized (e.g., smaller) portion of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., ceasing to display the entire baseplate 8021 and displaying only the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021 that is resized). Top view 8042 shows an outline of the resized baseplate 8021, a resized representation of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the central portion of the resized baseplate 8021.

[0275] Figure 81 illustrates an example transition from Figure 8H. Based on detecting the attention 8016 of the user 7002 moving away from the application user interface 8002 after the release of the air pinch gesture 8500-1, the computer system 101 ceases display of the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021 and the resize affordance 8024 (e.g., no portion of the baseplate 8021 indicated by the dotted line is visible to the user 7002) and optionally displays the move affordance 8014. Top view 8044 shows the resized representation of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the wall 7006’.

[0276] Figures 8J-8K illustrate that, once the resizing operation is initiated (e.g., by directing the attention 8016 toward the resize affordance 8024 while the hand 7022 performs the air pinch gesture 8500-1), the attention 8016 of the user 7002 does not need to stay on the application user interface 8002 while the air pinch gesture 8500-1 is maintained (e.g., in order for the resizing operation to continue). Figure 8J illustrates an example transition from Figure 8G. After the computer system 101 displays additional portions of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., all of the baseplate 8021 including the first portion 8020 and the second portion 8036) to visually indicate that the application user interface 8002 is receiving a resizing input (e.g., inresponse to detecting the air pinch gesture 8500-1 while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward the resize affordance 8024), subsequent movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 (e.g., away from or toward the viewpoint of the user 7002) results in resizing of the application user interface 8002 without requiring that the attention 8016 remain on the application user interface 8002. For example, Figure 8J illustrates the attention 8016 directed toward the wall 7006’, away from the application user interface 8002 while the air pinch gesture 8500-1 moves away from the viewpoint of the user 7002. The computer system 101 also continues displaying the additional portions of the baseplate 8021 during the resizing input (e.g., the air pinch gesture 8500-1) even though the attention 8016 is not directed toward any portion of the baseplate 8021. Top view 8046 shows the attention 8016 of the user 7002 being directed toward the left, away from the application user interface 8002 and the baseplate 8021.

[0277] Figure 8K illustrates an example transition from Figure 8J. Based on detecting the movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-1 away from the viewpoint of the user 7002 (Figure 8 J), the computer system 101 reduces the size of the chair 8004. In response to detecting the release of the air pinch gesture 8500-1, the computer system 101 ceases display of the resize affordance 8024 and transitions to displaying the move affordance 8014, while displaying a smaller portion of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., ceasing to display the entire baseplate 8021 and displaying only the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021, such as was displayed in Figure 8D just prior to detecting the air pinch gesture 8500-1 of Figure 8G). Alternatively, due to the attention 8016 of the user 7002 not being directed toward the application user interface 8002, the computer system 101 ceases to display the first portion 8020 of the baseplate 8021 and the move affordance 8014 (analogous to Figure 81). Top view 8048 shows an outline of a resized baseplate 8021, a resized representation of the three- dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the left.

[0278] Figures 8L-8M show the baseplate 8021 being displayed while the three- dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 is repositioned within the three-dimensional environment, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 8L illustrates a user input that includes the hand 7022 performing air pinch gesture 8500-2 (e.g., including bringing two fingers into contact) while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward (e.g., based on user 7002 gazing at or based on another gaze proxy) the moveaffordance 8014. In response to detecting the air pinch gesture 8500-2 while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward the move affordance 8014, the computer system 101 displays additional portions of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., all of the baseplate 8021 including the first portion 8020 and the second portion 8036) to visually indicate that the application user interface 8002 is receiving a movement input and to visually indicate a spatial extent of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002 to the user 7002. Top view 8050 shows the baseplate 8021, the move affordance 8014, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the move affordance 8014.

[0279] Figure 8M illustrates an example transition from Figure 8L. Figure 8M illustrates that the user input is followed by movement (e.g., upward, to the left, and / or away from the viewpoint of the user 7002) of the air pinch gesture 8500-2 (e.g., after the two fingers are brought into contact, and while this contact is maintained, the hand 7022 of user 7002 moves by more than a threshold movement amount). In response to detecting the movement of the air pinch gesture 8500-2, optionally while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 is directed toward the move affordance 8014, the computer system 101 displays the application user interface 8002, including the baseplate 8021, at an updated location in the three-dimensional environment that is based on the movement of the air pinch gesture 8500- 2. Top view 8052 shows the baseplate 8021, the move affordance 8014, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the move affordance 8014.

[0280] Figure 8N illustrates an example transition from Figure 8M. Based on detecting the release of the air pinch gesture 8500-2, optionally while the attention 8016 of the user 7002 remains directed toward the application user interface 8002, the computer system 101 optionally ceases to display one or more portions of the baseplate 8021 (e.g., maintaining display of the second portion 8036 of the baseplate 8021 due to the attention 8016 being directed toward the left side of the application user interface 8002, and optionally the move affordance 8014). Top view 8054 shows an outline of the baseplate 8021, a representation of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the move affordance 8014.

[0281] Figure 80 illustrates an example transition from Figure 8N. Based on detecting the attention 8016 of the user 7002 moving away from the application user interface 8002 after the release of the air pinch gesture 8500-2, the computer system 101 ceases displayof the second portion 8036 of the baseplate 8021 and the move affordance 8014. Top view 8056 shows the representation of the three-dimensional application content of the application user interface 8002, and the user 7002 directing the attention 8016 toward the sphere 7014’ instead of toward the application user interface 8002.

[0282] In contrast to Figures 8A-8O, which show an example of an application user interface displaying three-dimensional application content within a cylindrical application volume positioned above a circular baseplate 8021, Figure 8P shows an application user interface 8058 having a quadrilateral baseplate 8060 (e.g., demarcated in Figure 8P with a dotted outline). The application user interface 8058 displays three-dimensional application content that includes a table 8067 having four table legs. In response to detecting that the attention 8016 of the user 7002 (e.g., based on gaze of the user 7002 or a proxy for gaze) is directed toward a first portion 8064 of a boundary of the three-dimensional application content (e.g., a lower left boundary, toward a lower end of the front left leg of the table 8067), the computer system 101 visually emphasizes (e.g., highlighting with increased color, brightness, opacity, or making visible if previously not visible) the first portion 8064 of the baseplate 8060. In some embodiments, the baseplate 8060 confines three-dimensional content of the application user interface 8058 to a three-dimensional volume above the baseplate 8060. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 visually emphasizes the first portion 8064 (e.g., a front left quarter) of the baseplate 8060 and forgoes visually emphasizing (and / or visually deemphasizes) other portions (e.g., a front right quarter) of the baseplate 8060 in accordance with a determination that the attention 8016 is directed toward a region closer to the first portion 8064 than a second portion (e.g., adjacent to the first portion 8064). Based on the attention 8016 of the user 7002 being within a vicinity of (e.g., remaining on, or moving to another region within) the first portion 8064 (optionally within a vicinity of an edge 8074) for a threshold period of time (optionally before the attention 8016 is directed toward a resize affordance 8066), the computer system 101 displays the resize affordance 8066. In some embodiments, computer system 101 further visually emphasizes the edge ...

Claims

What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application; while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met as a result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying a first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location is on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met as the result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location is on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein: the first side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is outside of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is within the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

3. The method of claim 1, wherein:in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume has a first size, the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is within the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume has a second size that is different from the first size, the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is outside of the boundary of the first three- dimensional application volume.

4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein: the first location on the first side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is based on the first viewpoint of the user; and the second location on the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is based on the first viewpoint of the user.

5. The method of any of claims 1-4, wherein: displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment that is on the first side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume includes: in accordance with a determination that that the first viewpoint of the user is a first distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the first distance is outside of the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a respective distance from the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that that the first viewpoint of the user is a second distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second distance is different from the first distance and outside of the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at the respective distance from the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

6. The method of any of claims 1-5, wherein displaying the first user interface object at the second location in the three-dimensional environment that is on the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume includes: in accordance with a determination that that the first viewpoint of the user is a third distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume,wherein the third distance is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user; and in accordance with a determination that that the first viewpoint of the user is a fourth distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the fourth distance is different from the third distance and within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at the respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user.

7. The method of any of claims 1-6, including: displaying the first user interface object displayed at the first location in the three- dimensional environment on the first side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume with a first orientation that is based on an orientation of a portion of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to the first location; and displaying the first user interface object displayed at the second location in the three- dimensional environment on the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume with a second orientation that is different from the first orientation, wherein the second orientation is based on an orientation of a portion of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to the second location.

8. The method of claim 7, wherein displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user corresponds to a first viewpoint location in the three-dimensional environment, displaying the first user interface object at a first position relative to the three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user corresponds to a second viewpoint location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second viewpoint location is different from the first viewpoint location, displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position.

9. The method of any of claims 7-8, wherein displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment includes:in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user corresponds to a third viewpoint location in the three-dimensional environment that is within a respective viewpoint range, displaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the three-dimensional application volume; in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user corresponds to a fourth viewpoint location in the three-dimensional environment that is different from the third viewpoint location and outside of the respective viewpoint range, displaying the first user interface object at a fourth position relative to the three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user corresponds to a fifth viewpoint location in the three-dimensional environment that is different from the third viewpoint location and within the respective viewpoint range, displaying the first user interface object at the third position relative to the three-dimensional application volume.

10. The method of any of claims 1-9, wherein: displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment on the first side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is at a first viewpoint position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a first orientation; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is at a second viewpoint position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second viewpoint position is different from the first viewpoint position, displaying the first user interface object with a second orientation that is different from the first orientation; and displaying the first user interface object at the second location in the three- dimensional environment on the second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is at the first viewpoint position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a third orientation; andin accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is at the second viewpoint position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a fourth orientation that is different from the third orientation.

11. The method of claim 10, wherein: the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume is associated with a characteristic pitch angle; and displaying the first user interface object with the first orientation includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is associated with a first viewpoint pitch angle, displaying the first user interface object with a first object pitch angle that is between the first viewpoint pitch angle and the characteristic pitch angle; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is associated with a second viewpoint pitch angle that is different from the first viewpoint pitch angle, displaying the first user interface object with a second object pitch angle that is between the second viewpoint pitch angle and the characteristic pitch angle and that is different from the first object pitch angle; and displaying the first user interface object with the second orientation includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is associated with the first viewpoint pitch angle, displaying the first user interface object with a third object pitch angle that is between the first viewpoint pitch angle and the characteristic pitch angle; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is associated with the second viewpoint pitch angle, displaying the first user interface object with a fourth object pitch angle that is between the second viewpoint pitch angle and the characteristic pitch angle and that is different from the third object pitch angle.

12. The method of any of claims 1-11, wherein the boundary of the first three- dimensional application volume is curved.

13. The method of any of claims 1-12, wherein the boundary of the first three- dimensional application volume is flat.

14. The method of any of claims 1-13, including, while the first user interface object is displayed at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment that is within the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume, visually deemphasizing one or more portions of the first three-dimensional application volume that correspond to the respective location.

15. The method of any of claims 1-14, wherein the first user interface object at least partially obscures content of the first application that is included in the first three-dimensional application volume.

16. The method of any of claims 1-15, wherein displaying the first user interface object includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is a first distance from the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a first scale relative to a size of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is a second distance from the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a second scale relative to the size of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second distance is different from the first distance, and the second scale is different from the first scale.

17. The method of claim 16, wherein: the first distance and the second distance are within a respective range of distances; and displaying the first user interface object includes: in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is a third distance from the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with a third scale relative to the size of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first viewpoint of the user is a fourth distance from the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object with the third scale relative to the size of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the third distance and the fourth distance are outside of therespective range of distances, and the third scale is different from the first scale and from the second scale.

18. The method of any of claims 1-17, including displaying, in the first user interface object via the one or more display generation components, one or more controls for performing respective corresponding operations with respect to the first user interface object and / or the first application.

19. The method of any of claims 1-18, including, in conjunction with displaying the first user interface object, visually deemphasizing the first three-dimensional application volume.

20. The method of any of claims 1-19, including: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to the first viewpoint of the user, and includes a second three- dimensional application volume that corresponds to a second application; while displaying the second three-dimensional application volume in the second view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a second event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the second event, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second user interface object at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment without regard to whether the first viewpoint of the user is outside of or within the first threshold range of a respective portion of the second three- dimensional application volume.

21. The method of any of claims 1-20, including: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a third view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the third view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to the first viewpoint of the user, and includes a third three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a third application; while displaying the third three-dimensional application volume in the third view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a third event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the third event, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a third user interface object at a respective location on or within the third three-dimensional application volume without regard to whether the firstviewpoint of the user is outside of or within the first threshold range of a respective portion of the third three-dimensional application volume.

22. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-21.

23. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-21.

24. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 1-21.

25. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application; while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met as a result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume,displaying a first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location is on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met as the result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location is on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

26. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application; while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met as a result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying a first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location is on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met as the result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensionalenvironment, wherein the second location is on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

27. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application; means, enabled while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, for detecting occurrence of a first event; and means, enabled in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event, for: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met as a result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is outside of a first threshold range of a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying a first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location is on a first side of a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met as the result of the occurrence of the first event and that the first viewpoint of the user is within the first threshold range of the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location is on a second side of the boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume.

28. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes first application content that corresponds to a first application;while displaying the first application content that corresponds to the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting a first change in position of attention of a user relative to the first application content; and in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of a first boundary that confines the first application content in two or more dimensions than to a second portion of the first boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the first boundary relative to the second portion of the first boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to the second portion of the first boundary than the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the second portion of the first boundary relative to the first portion of the first boundary.

29. The method of claim 28, wherein detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content includes detecting that the attention of the user has moved to a respective location in the three-dimensional environment that meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria require that the respective location is within a first threshold range of the first boundary in order for the first criteria to be met.

30. The method of any of claims 28-29, wherein the first portion of the first boundary is a portion of a respective two-dimensional surface, and the second portion of the first boundary is a different portion of the respective two-dimensional surface.

31. The method of any of claims 28-30, including: in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a respective portion of the first boundary than to one or more other portions of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the respective portion of the first boundary relative to the one or more other portions of the first boundary.

32. The method of any of claims 28-31, including:in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: displaying one or more portions of the first boundary that extend in a first dimension and a second dimension without displaying one or more portions of the first boundary that extend in a third dimension that is different from the first dimension and from the second dimension.

33. The method of any of claims 28-32, including: while visually emphasizing a respective portion of the first boundary, detecting a second change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content; and in response to detecting the second change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a third portion of the first boundary than to the respective portion of the first boundary: ceasing to visually emphasize the respective portion of the first boundary, and visually emphasizing the third portion of the first boundary relative to the respective portion of the first boundary.

34. The method of any of claims 28-33, wherein detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content includes detecting a change in position of a gaze of the user relative to the first application content.

35. The method of any of claims 28-34, wherein detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content includes detecting movement of a viewpoint of the user relative to the first application content.

36. The method of any of claims 28-35, wherein the first portion of the first boundary is a portion of a first surface of the first boundary, and the second portion of the first boundary is a portion of a second surface of the first boundary.

37. The method of any of claims 28-36, wherein visually emphasizing a respective portion of the first boundary includes displaying a region of the respective portion that iscloser to an edge of the first boundary with greater visual emphasis than a region of the respective portion that is further from the edge of the first boundary.

38. The method of any of claims 28-37, including: in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content, displaying at least one of the first portion of the first boundary and the second portion of the first boundary without displaying one or more additional portions of the first boundary that are different from the first portion and from the second portion; and while displaying the at least one of the first portion of the first boundary and the second portion of the first boundary without displaying the one or more additional portions of the first boundary, detecting a user input corresponding to a request to resize the first application content; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to resize the first application content, displaying the one or more additional portions of the first boundary.

39. The method of claim 38, including: in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content, displaying a first extent of the first boundary; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to resize the first application content, displaying a second extent of the first boundary, wherein the second extent is greater than the first extent.

40. The method of any of claims 28-39, including: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the second view of the three-dimensional environment includes second application content that corresponds to a second application; while displaying the second application content that corresponds to the second application in the second view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the attention of the user has moved relative to the second application content; and in response to detecting that the attention of the user has moved relative to the second application content:in accordance with a determination that the second application content does not extend to a second boundary that confines the second application content in two or more dimensions and that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of the second boundary than to a second portion of the second boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the second boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the second boundary relative to the second portion of the second boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the second application content extends to the second boundary, forgoing visually emphasizing the first portion of the second boundary relative to the second portion of the second boundary.

41. The method of any of claims 28-40, including displaying one or more application management controls corresponding to the first application at respective positions relative to the first application content based on the first boundary.

42. The method of claim 41, wherein the one or more application management controls include one or more auxiliary user interface elements displayed outside of the first boundary.

43. The method of any of claims 41-42, wherein the one or more application management controls include a resize affordance.

44. The method of claim 43, wherein: detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content includes detecting a change in position of the attention of the user to a respective location in the three-dimensional environment that is outside of a first region corresponding to the resize affordance; and the resize affordance is displayed in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user to the respective location in the three-dimensional environment.

45. The method of claim 44, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the respective location in the three- dimensional environment is a first location in the three-dimensional environment, the resize affordance is displayed with a first spatial relationship relative to the first boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the respective location in the three- dimensional environment is a second location in the three-dimensional environment that isdifferent from the first location, the resize affordance is displayed with a second spatial relationship relative to the first boundary that is different from the first spatial relationship.

46. The method of any of claims 44-45, wherein the resize affordance displayed in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user to the respective location in the three-dimensional environment is displayed with a first appearance, and the method includes: while displaying the resize affordance with the first appearance, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content to the first region corresponding to the resize affordance; and in response to detecting the change in position of the attention of the user to the first region corresponding to the resize affordance, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the resize affordance with a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

47. The method of any of claims 44-46, including: while displaying the resize affordance, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in position of the attention of the user outside of a second region corresponding to the resize affordance; and in response to detecting the change in position of the attention of the user outside of the second region corresponding to the resize affordance, ceasing to display the resize affordance.

48. The method of any of claims 41-47, wherein the one or more application management controls include a move affordance.

49. The method of any of claims 41-48, wherein the one or more application management controls have a three-dimensional appearance that includes a non-zero length, non-zero width, and non-zero depth.

50. The method of any of claims 41-49, wherein displaying a respective control of the one or more application management controls includes:in accordance with a determination that the first boundary has a first volumetric shape, displaying the respective control of the one or more application management controls with a first shape; and in accordance with a determination that the first boundary has a second volumetric shape that is different from the first volumetric shape, displaying the respective control of the one or more application management controls with a second shape that is different from the first shape.

51. The method of any of claims 28-50, wherein displaying the first view of the three- dimensional environment includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, third application content concurrently with the first application content with an overlap between a portion of a third boundary that confines the third application content in two or more dimensions and a portion of the first boundary, and the method includes: while displaying the third application content concurrently with the first application content, detecting, via the one or more input devices, that the attention of the user is directed toward the overlap between the portion of the first boundary of the first application content and the portion of the third boundary of the third application content; and in response to detecting that the attention of the user is directed toward the overlap between the portion of the first boundary of the first application content and the portion of the third boundary of the third application content: in accordance with a determination that the first application content has higher priority than the third application content, visually emphasizing the portion of the first boundary of the first application content relative to the portion of the third boundary of the third application content; and in accordance with a determination that the third application content has higher priority than the first application content, visually emphasizing the portion of the third boundary of the third application content relative to the portion of the first boundary of the first application content.

52. The method of any of claims 28-51, including: while displaying one or more portions of the first boundary:in accordance with a determination that the first application is associated with a first boundary appearance setting, displaying the one or more portions of the first boundary with a first appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the first application is associated with a second boundary appearance setting that is different from the first boundary appearance setting, displaying the one or more portions of the first boundary with a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

53. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 28-52.

54. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 28-52.

55. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 28-52.

56. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes first application content that corresponds to a first application;while displaying the first application content that corresponds to the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting a first change in position of attention of a user relative to the first application content; and in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of a first boundary that confines the first application content in two or more dimensions than to a second portion of the first boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the first boundary relative to the second portion of the first boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to the second portion of the first boundary than the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the second portion of the first boundary relative to the first portion of the first boundary.

57. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes first application content that corresponds to a first application; while displaying the first application content that corresponds to the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting a first change in position of attention of a user relative to the first application content; and in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of a first boundary that confines the first application content in two or more dimensions than to a second portion of the first boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the first boundary relative to the second portion of the first boundary; andin accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to the second portion of the first boundary than the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the second portion of the first boundary relative to the first portion of the first boundary.

58. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes first application content that corresponds to a first application; means, enabled while displaying the first application content that corresponds to the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, for detecting a first change in position of attention of a user relative to the first application content; and means, enabled in response to detecting the first change in position of the attention of the user relative to the first application content, for: in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to a first portion of a first boundary that confines the first application content in two or more dimensions than to a second portion of the first boundary that is adjacent to the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the first portion of the first boundary relative to the second portion of the first boundary; and in accordance with a determination that the attention of the user has moved closer to the second portion of the first boundary than the first portion of the first boundary, visually emphasizing the second portion of the first boundary relative to the first portion of the first boundary.

59. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, wherein the first three-dimensional application volume has a first size at a first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment, and wherein three-dimensional application content of the first application is confined within the first three-dimensional application volume; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to a second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the first user input that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a second size of the first three-dimensional application volume that is different from the first size of the first three-dimensional application volume.

60. The method of claim 59, including: while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three- dimensional application element with a first element size and displaying a second three- dimensional application element with a second element size, wherein the second three- dimensional application element is different from the first three-dimensional application element; and while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three-dimensional application element with a third element size and displaying the second three-dimensional application element with a fourth element size; wherein the third element size is different from the first element size, the fourth element size is different from the second element size, and a ratio of the third element size to the first element size is equal to a ratio of the fourth element size to the second element size.

61. The method of any of claims 59-60, including:while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first application element with a first element size and displaying a second application element with a second element size, wherein the second application element is different from the first application element; and while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first application element with a third element size that is different from the first element size and displaying the second application element with the second element size.

62. The method of claim 61, wherein: the first application element includes first three-dimensional content of the first application; the second application element includes second three-dimensional content of the first application; and the second three-dimensional content of the first application is different from the first three-dimensional content of the first application.

63. The method of any of claims 61-62, wherein: the first application element includes two-dimensional content of the first application; and the second application element includes three-dimensional content of the first application.

64. The method of any of claims 61-63, wherein: the first application element includes one or more auxiliary user interface elements that are different from the first three-dimensional application volume and that correspond to the first application; and the second application element includes three-dimensional application content of the first application confined within the first three-dimensional application volume.

65. The method of any of claims 61-64, wherein the second depth is greater than the first depth, and the method includes:detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume to a respective depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume to the respective depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three-dimensional application volume at the respective depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; including: in accordance with a determination that the respective depth is less than the first depth, displaying the first application element with the first element size; and in accordance with a determination that the respective depth is greater than the first depth, displaying the first application element with the second element size.

66. The method of any of claims 61-65, including: while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a third application element with a fourth element size, wherein the third application element is different from the first application element and from the second application element; and while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the third application element with a fifth element size that is different from the fourth element size; wherein: the first application element displayed with the third element size is changed in size in a first resizing direction relative to the first application element displayed with the first element size; and the third application element displayed with the fifth element size is changed in size in a second resizing direction relative to the third application element displayed with the fourth element size, wherein the second resizing direction is different from the first resizing direction.

67. The method of any of claims 59-66, wherein displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size that is different from the first size is performed in accordance with one or more settings of the first application.

68. The method of any of claims 59-67, wherein the first viewpoint of the user is in a first direction relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, the first three- dimensional application volume includes a respective two-dimensional content element displayed with a first orientation relative to the first three-dimensional application volume that is based on the first direction of the first viewpoint of the user, and the method includes: detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement of a current viewpoint of the user relative to the first three-dimensional application volume from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint relative to the first three-dimensional application volume that is in a second direction relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second direction is different from the first direction; and in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint in the first direction to the second viewpoint in the second direction relative to the first three-dimensional application volume: in accordance with a determination that a respective setting of the first application is enabled: ceasing to display the respective two-dimensional content element with the first orientation relative to the first three-dimensional application volume; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective two-dimensional content element with a second orientation relative to the first three-dimensional application volume that is based on the second direction of the second viewpoint of the user, wherein the second orientation is different from the first orientation.

69. The method of claim 68, wherein displaying the respective two-dimensional content element with the second orientation relative to the first three-dimensional application volume that is based on the second direction of the second viewpoint of the user is performed in accordance with one or more orientation update parameters of the first application without providing, to the first application, the second viewpoint of the user.

70. The method of any of claims 59-69, including:displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first view of the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the first viewpoint of the user and that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement of a current viewpoint of the user relative to the first three-dimensional application volume to a second viewpoint that is different from the first viewpoint and that is the second depth relative to the first three-dimensional application volume; and in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user to the second viewpoint, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the first size.

71. The method of any of claims 59-70, including: while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume to a third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, wherein the second depth is between the first depth and the third depth; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume to the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the display generation component, the first three-dimensional application volume at the third depth with the second size.

72. The method of any of claims 59-70, wherein the second depth is greater than the first depth, and the method includes: while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume further than the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; in response to detecting the second set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume further than the seconddepth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, maintaining display of the first three- dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size; displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to the first viewpoint of the user, and includes a second three- dimensional application volume that corresponds to a second application, wherein the second three-dimensional application volume has a respective size at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment, and wherein three- dimensional application content of the second application is confined within the second three- dimensional application volume; while displaying the second view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the second three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the respective size, detecting, via the one or more display generation components, a third set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the second three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to a third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, wherein the third depth is greater than the first depth; in response to detecting the third set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the second three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the second three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second three-dimensional application volume at the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with the respective size of the second three-dimensional application volume; while displaying the second three-dimensional application volume at the third depth with the respective size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a fourth set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the second three-dimensional application volume further than the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the fourth set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the second three-dimensional application volume further than the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, maintaining display of the second three-dimensional application volume at the third depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with the respective size, wherein the third depth is different from the second depth.

73. The method of any of claims 59-72, wherein: displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size includes displaying a respective application content element corresponding to the first three-dimensional application volume; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth with the second size includes: in accordance with a determination that the second size of the first three- dimensional application volume exceeds a size threshold, ceasing to display the respective application content element corresponding to the first three-dimensional application volume.

74. The method of claim 73, including: while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at a respective depth with a respective size without displaying the respective application content element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the respective depth to a fourth depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the respective depth to the fourth depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the respective depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three- dimensional application volume at the fourth depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a third size of the first three-dimensional application volume that is different from the respective size of the first three-dimensional application volume, including: in accordance with a determination that the third size of the first three- dimensional application volume does not exceed the size threshold, displaying, via the one ormore display generation components, the respective application content element corresponding to the first three-dimensional application volume.

75. The method of any of claims 59-74, including: while displaying the three-dimensional environment with a respective size, including displaying in the first three-dimensional application volume a respective application content element of the first application at a respective content size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that correspond to a request to resize the first three-dimensional application volume; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that correspond to the request to resize the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three-dimensional application volume with a size that is different from the respective size, including displaying the respective application content element at a content size that is different from the respective content size.

76. The method of any of claims 59-75, including: while displaying the first three-dimensional application volume with a respective size, including displaying in the first three-dimensional application volume a first amount of content of the first application, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that correspond to a request to resize the first three-dimensional application volume; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that correspond to the request to resize the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three-dimensional application volume with a size that is different from the respective size and with a second amount of content that is different from the first amount of content.

77. The method of any of claims 59-76, including visually deemphasizing content of the first application displayed in a first portion of the first three-dimensional application volume relative to content of the first application displayed in a second portion of the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the first portion is closer to a boundary of the first three-dimensional application volume than the second portion.

78. The method of claim 77, wherein visually deemphasizing the content of the first application displayed in the first portion of the first three-dimensional application volume relative to the content of the first application displayed in the second portion of the first three- dimensional application volume includes: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume has a first volumetric shape, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the content of the first application in the first portion of the first three-dimensional application volume with a first type of visual deemphasis relative to the content of the first application in the second portion of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume has a second volumetric shape that is different from the first volumetric shape, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the content of the first application in the first portion of the first three-dimensional application volume with a second type of visual deemphasis relative to the content of the first application in the second portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the second type of visual deemphasis is different from the first type of visual deemphasis.

79. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 59-78.

80. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 59-78.

81. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 59-78.

82. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, wherein the first three-dimensional application volume has a first size at a first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three- dimensional environment, and wherein three-dimensional application content of the first application is confined within the first three-dimensional application volume; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to a second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the first user input that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a second size of the first three-dimensional application volume that is different from the first size of the first three-dimensional application volume.

83. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensionalapplication volume that corresponds to a first application, wherein the first three-dimensional application volume has a first size at a first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment, and wherein three-dimensional application content of the first application is confined within the first three-dimensional application volume; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to a second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the first user input that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a second size of the first three- dimensional application volume that is different from the first size of the first three- dimensional application volume.

84. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, wherein the first three-dimensional application volume has a first size at a first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user in the three-dimensional environment, and wherein three-dimensional application content of the first application is confined within the first three-dimensional application volume; means, enabled while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth with the first size, for detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first three- dimensional application volume from the first depth to a second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; andmeans, enabled in response to detecting the first user input that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first depth to the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user, for: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume at the first depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and displaying the first three-dimensional application volume at the second depth relative to the first viewpoint of the user with a second size of the first three-dimensional application volume that is different from the first size of the first three-dimensional application volume.

85. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a respective application, and a first user interface object that is displayed at a first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume; while displaying the first user interface object at the first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, detecting movement of a current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint; and in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria include a requirement that the first three- dimensional application volume is a first type of application volume in order to for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that the firstthree-dimensional application volume is a second type of application volume in order for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the third position is different from the first position and the second position.

86. The method of claim 85, wherein the first user interface object includes a move affordance that is selectable to initiate repositioning of the first three-dimensional application volume relative to the three-dimensional environment.

87. The method of claim 86, wherein the first three-dimensional application volume has a first application orientation relative to the three-dimensional environment while the current viewpoint of the user is the first viewpoint and while the current viewpoint of the user is the second viewpoint, and the method includes: while the current viewpoint of the user is the second viewpoint, and the first three- dimensional application volume has the first application orientation relative to the three- dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a selection input directed to the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the selection input directed to the first user interface object: ceasing to display the first three-dimensional application volume with the first application orientation relative to the three-dimensional environment; and displaying, via the one or more input devices, the first three-dimensional application volume with a second application orientation relative to the three-dimensional environment that is different from the first application orientation, wherein the second application orientation is based on the second viewpoint of the user.

88. The method of any of claims 85-87, wherein the first user interface object includes an alert for the respective application.

89. The method of claim 88, wherein: the first user interface object displayed at the first position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume is displayed with a first orientation;the first user interface object displayed at the second position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume is displayed with a second orientation that is different from the first orientation; and the first user interface object that is displayed at the third position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume is displayed with a third orientation that is different from the first orientation.

90. The method of any of claims 85-89, wherein: the second position is selected from a first finite set of available positions relative to the first three-dimensional application volume for the first user interface object; and the third position is selected from a second finite set of available positions relative to the first three-dimensional application volume for the first user interface object.

91. The method of claim 90, wherein the available positions in at least one of the first finite set of available positions and the second finite set of available positions are specified by one or more settings of the respective application.

92. The method of any of claims 90-91, wherein: determining that the first three-dimensional application volume is the first type of application volume includes determining that the first three-dimensional application volume corresponds to a first application; determining that the first three-dimensional application volume is the second type of application volume includes determining that the first three-dimensional application volume corresponds to a second application that is different from the first application; the first finite set of available positions includes a first number of positions; and the second finite set of available positions includes a second number of positions that is different from the first number of positions.

93. The method of any of claims 90-92, wherein: determining that the first three-dimensional application volume is the first type of application volume includes determining that the first three-dimensional application volume has a first volumetric shape;determining that the first three-dimensional application volume is the second type of application volume includes determining that the first three-dimensional application volume has a second volumetric shape that is different from the first volumetric shape; the first finite set of available positions includes a first number of positions; and the second finite set of available positions includes a second number of positions that is different from the first number of positions.

94. The method of any of claims 90-93, wherein the available positions of a respective finite set are distributed relative to the first three-dimensional application volume.

95. The method of any of claims 85-94, wherein detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, movement of the current viewpoint of the user through one or more intermediate viewpoints between the first viewpoint and the second viewpoint, and the method includes: in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user through the one or more intermediate viewpoints between the first viewpoint and the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets the first criteria, moving the first user interface object through one or more intermediate positions between the first position and the second position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets the second criteria, moving the first user interface object through one or more intermediate positions between the first position and the third position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume.

96. The method of any of claims 85-92, wherein: the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint satisfies viewpoint movement criteria; the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint includes respective movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a respective viewpoint between the first viewpoint and the second viewpoint, wherein the respective movement does not satisfy the viewpoint movement criteria; andthe method includes: in response to detecting the respective movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the respective viewpoint, maintaining display of the first user interface object at the first position.

97. The method of claim 96, wherein the viewpoint movement criteria include a requirement that a magnitude of the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint exceeds a threshold magnitude of viewpoint movement in order for the viewpoint movement criteria to be met.

98. The method of any of claims 96-97, wherein the viewpoint movement criteria include a requirement that the current viewpoint moves outside of a threshold range of viewpoints in order for the viewpoint movement criteria to be met.

99. The method of any of claims 96-98, wherein: ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object progressing through a plurality of intermediate display states with decreasing visual emphasis; and displaying the first user interface object at a respective position that is different from the first position includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object progressing through a plurality of intermediate display states with increasing visual emphasis.

100. The method of any of claims 85-99, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes a second user interface object that is displayed at a respective position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint is detected while displaying the second user interface object at the respective position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, and the method includes: in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint:displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second user interface object at the respective position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume.

101. The method of any of claims 85-100, including: in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is configured by the respective application to change orientation in response to movement of the current viewpoint of the user, changing an orientation of the first user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is not configured by the respective application to change orientation in response to movement of the current viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the orientation of the first user interface object.

102. The method of claim 101, including, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is configured by the respective application to change orientation in response to movement of the current viewpoint of the user, changing the orientation of the first user interface object during the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

103. The method of claim 101, including: in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is configured by the respective application to change orientation in response to movement of the current viewpoint of the user: forgoing changing the orientation of the first user interface object prior to detecting at least a threshold amount of movement of the current viewpoint of the user away from the first viewpoint; and changing the orientation of the first user interface object in response to detecting at least the threshold amount of movement of the current viewpoint of the user away from the first viewpoint.

104. The method of any of claims 85-103, including: in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint, and in accordance with a determination that the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint includes less than a threshold amount of movement during a threshold amount of time, displaying the first user interface object at a respective position of the second position and the third position.

105. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 85-104.

106. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 85-104.

107. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 85-104.

108. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a respective application, and a first user interface object that is displayed at a first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume;while displaying the first user interface object at the first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, detecting movement of a current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint; and in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria include a requirement that the first three- dimensional application volume is a first type of application volume in order to for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that the first three-dimensional application volume is a second type of application volume in order for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the third position is different from the first position and the second position.

109. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a respective application, and a first user interface object that is displayed at a first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume;while displaying the first user interface object at the first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, detecting movement of a current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint; and in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria include a requirement that the first three-dimensional application volume is a first type of application volume in order to for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that the first three-dimensional application volume is a second type of application volume in order for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, wherein the third position is different from the first position and the second position.

110. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a respective application, and a first user interface object that is displayed at a first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume; means, enabled while displaying the first user interface object at the first position relative to the first three-dimensional application volume, for detecting movement of a current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint; andmeans, enabled in response to detecting the movement of the current viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint, for: in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria include a requirement that the first three- dimensional application volume is a first type of application volume in order to for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a second position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the second position is different from the first position; and in accordance with a determination that the first three-dimensional application volume meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that the first three-dimensional application volume is a second type of application volume in order for the first criteria to be met, ceasing to display the first user interface object at the first position and displaying the first user interface object at a third position relative to the first three- dimensional application volume, wherein the third position is different from the first position and the second position.

111. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, and wherein the first three-dimensional application volume confines content of the first application, including a first portion of the content of the first application and a second portion of the content of the first application, in two or more dimensions; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, including the first three-dimensional application volume that confines the content of the first application in the two or more dimensions, detecting that user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application; and in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application:in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

112. The method of claim 111, including: detecting that user interface focus is directed to the second portion of the content of the first application; and in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the second portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the content of the first application is behind the first portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the first portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the second portion of the content of the first application.

113. The method of any of claims 111-112, wherein: determining that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user includes determining that the first portion of the content of the first application and the second portion of the content of the first application do not overlap relative to the first viewpoint of the user.

114. The method of any of claims 111-113, wherein detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, that gaze of the user is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application.

115. The method of any of claims 111-114, wherein detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, that a gaze of the user is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application and detecting a selection input.

116. The method of any of claims 111-115, wherein detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, an audio input indicating that the user interface focus is to be directed to the first portion of the content of the first application.

117. The method of any of claims 111-116, wherein detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input directing the user interface focus to the first portion of the content of the first application.

118. The method of any of claims 111-113, wherein detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application includes detecting an event that is independent of user input directing the user interface focus to the first portion of the content of the first application.

119. The method of any of claims 111-118, including: while displaying the second portion of the content of the first application with the one or more changed visual properties to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application, detecting an event that corresponds to a change in size and / or position of the first portion of the content of the first application; in response to detecting the change in size and / or position of the first portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the changed first portion of the content of the first application is behind one or more additional portions of the content of the first application, adjacent to the second portion of the content of the first application, relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the one or more additional portions adjacent to the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the changed first portion of the content of the first application.

120. The method of any of claims 111-119, wherein changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes ceasing to display at least a portion of the second portion of the content.

121. The method of claim 111, wherein ceasing to display at least the portion of the second portion of the content includes ceasing to display a portion of the second portion of the content that conforms to at least a portion of a shape of the first portion.

122. The method of any of claims 111-120, wherein changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes decreasing an opacity of the second portion of the content.

123. The method of claim 111, wherein decreasing the opacity of the second portion of the content includes decreasing the opacity of the second portion of the content in accordance with a change in viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint of the user to a second viewpoint of the user that is different from the first viewpoint of the user.

124. The method of any of claims 111-122, wherein the changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes applying a feathering visual effect to one or more regions of the second portion of the content.

125. The method of any of claims 111-124, including: while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first user interface object at a first location within the first three-dimensional application volume, including, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object at the first location is behind a respective portion of the content of the first application, changing one or more visual properties of the respective portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first user interface object.

126. The method of any of claims 111-125, including: after changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application, and while displaying the second portion of the first application with the changed visual properties that increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input directed toward the first portion of the content of the first application that is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint; and in response to detecting the user input directed toward the first portion of the content of the first application that is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint, performing an operation associated with the first portion of the content of the first application that is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first view.

127. The method of any of claims 111-126, wherein: changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes: in accordance with a determination that one or more application content elements of the first application are displayed in front of the first portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the one or more application content elements of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that one or more application content elements of the first application are displayed behind the first portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual properties of the one or more application content elements of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

128. The method of any of claims 111-127, wherein changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes:in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the content of the first application includes two-dimensional content, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application by applying a first visual effect to reduce visibility of the two-dimensional content; and in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the content of the first application includes three-dimensional content, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application by applying a second visual effect that is different from the first visual effect.

129. The method of claim 128, wherein applying the second visual effect to reduce visibility of the three-dimensional content that is different from applying the first visual effect to reduce visibility of the two-dimensional content is performed in accordance with one or more settings of the first application.

130. The method of any of claims 111-129, including: prior to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a second application that is different from the first application, wherein the second three-dimensional application volume confines content of the second application; after changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application, detecting that the user interface focus is directed to a portion of the content of the second application; in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the portion of the content of the second application: in accordance with a determination that the portion of the content of the second application is behind a portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user: changing one or more visual properties of the portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the portion of the content of the second application; andmaintaining the changes to the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application while the portion of the content of the second application remains behind the portion of the content of the first application.

131. The method of any of claims 111-130, including: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a third portion of the content of the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first portion of the content, the second portion of the content, and the third portion of the content are each displayed at distinct distances relative to the first viewpoint of the user; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the third portion of the content of the first application; and in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the third portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the third portion of the content of the first application is behind both the first portion of the content of the first application and the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, and that a priority of the third portion of the content is higher than a priority of the second portion of the content and higher than a priority of the first portion of the content, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content and the first portion of the content to increase a visibility of the third portion of the content of the first application.

132. The method of any of claims 111-130, including: displaying a third portion of the content of the first application in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first portion of the content, the second portion of the content, and the third portion of the content are displayed at different distances relative to the first viewpoint of the user; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the third portion of the content of the first application; andin response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the third portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application and the second portion of the content of the first application has a first spatial relationship relative to the first viewpoint of the user, and that the third portion of the content of the first application has a second spatial relationship relative to the first viewpoint of the user, different from the first spatial relationship.

133. The method of any of claims 111-132, wherein: the first portion of the content of the first application includes a plurality of content elements; and changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the plurality of content elements.

134. The method of any of claims 111-133, wherein changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application includes: in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the content of the first application has a first degree of opacity prior to changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application, changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application by a first amount; and in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the content of the first application has a second degree of opacity, different from the first degree of opacity, prior to changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application, changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application by a second amount different from the first amount.

135. The method of claim 134, including: after changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase the visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application, detecting an event corresponding to a change in one or more visual properties of the first portion of the content of the first application; andin response to detecting the event corresponding to the change in the one or more visual properties of the first portion of the content of the first application, at least partially reversing the changes to the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application.

136. The method of any of claims 111-135, wherein the first portion of the content of the first application includes one or more affordances for performing operations corresponding to the three-dimensional application volume, the method includes: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input selecting a first affordance of the one or more affordance for performing operations corresponding to the three- dimensional application volume; and in response to detecting the user input selecting the first affordance, performing a first operation corresponding to three-dimensional application volume based on the first affordance.

137. The method of any of claims 111-136, wherein the first portion of the content of the first application includes one or more affordances for performing operations corresponding to a content element of the first application, the method includes: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input selecting a first affordance of the one or more affordance for performing operations corresponding to the content element of the first application; and in response to detecting the user input selecting the first affordance, performing a first operation corresponding to the content element of the first application based on the first affordance.

138. The method of any of claims 111-137, wherein the first portion of the content of the first application includes a content element associated with a third portion of the content of the first application139. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 111-138.

140. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 111-138.

141. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 111-138.

142. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, and wherein the first three-dimensional application volume confines content of the first application, including a first portion of the content of the first application and a second portion of the content of the first application, in two or more dimensions; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, including the first three-dimensional application volume that confines the content of the first application in the two or more dimensions, detecting that user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application; and in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; andin accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

143. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, and wherein the first three- dimensional application volume confines content of the first application, including a first portion of the content of the first application and a second portion of the content of the first application, in two or more dimensions; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, including the first three-dimensional application volume that confines the content of the first application in the two or more dimensions, detecting that user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application; and in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual propertiesof the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

144. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user, and includes a first three-dimensional application volume that corresponds to a first application, and wherein the first three- dimensional application volume confines content of the first application, including a first portion of the content of the first application and a second portion of the content of the first application, in two or more dimensions; means, enabled while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, including the first three-dimensional application volume that confines the content of the first application in the two or more dimensions, for detecting that user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application; and means, enabled in response to detecting that the user interface focus is directed to the first portion of the content of the first application, for: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, changing one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the content of the first application is not behind the second portion of the content of the first application relative to the first viewpoint of the user, forgoing changing the one or more visual properties of the second portion of the content of the first application to increase a visibility of the first portion of the content of the first application.

145. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices:displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment that includes a first three-dimensional volume that includes three- dimensional virtual content; while displaying the first three-dimensional volume in the first view of the three- dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event for displaying a first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a first type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location has a first spatial relationship to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a second type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second type of content is different from the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location has a second spatial relationship, different from the first spatial relationship, to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

146. The method of claim 145, wherein the first user interface object has the first spatial relationship to an application management control of the first three-dimensional volume.

147. The method of claim 145 or claim 146, wherein: the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; and the first user interface object is displayed with a first orientation with respect to the first viewpoint of the user.

148. The method of any of claims 145-147, wherein:prior to detecting the occurrence of the first event for displaying the first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume, the first three- dimensional volume is displayed, via the one or more display generation components, at a third location in the three-dimensional environment; and displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment includes maintaining display of the first three-dimensional volume at the third location in the three-dimensional environment.

149. The method of any of claims 145-148, including: in accordance with a determination that displaying the first user interface object at the first location in the three-dimensional environment would result in a portion of the first user interface object and a portion of the three-dimensional virtual content of the first three- dimensional volume being displayed at a same location in the three-dimensional environment, changing, via the one or more display generation components, one or more visual properties of at least one of the portion of the first user interface object or the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content.

150. The method of claim 145, wherein the second type of content is a two-dimensional user interface element within the first three-dimensional volume and the first user interface object has the second spatial relationship to the two-dimensional user interface element.

151. The method of claim 150, wherein a plane of the first user interface obj ect is parallel to a plane of the two-dimensional user interface element.

152. The method of claim 150 or claim 151, wherein: prior to detecting the occurrence of the first event for displaying the first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume, the two-dimensional user interface element within the first three-dimensional volume is displayed, via the one or more display generation components, at a fourth location in the three-dimensional environment, and displaying the first user interface object at the second location in the three- dimensional environment includes changing a location of the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment.

153. The method of any of claims 150-152, including: in accordance with a determination that displaying the two-dimensional user interface element within the first three-dimensional volume would result in a portion of the two- dimensional user interface element and a portion of the three-dimensional virtual content of the first three-dimensional volume being displayed at a same location in the three- dimensional environment, changing, via the one or more display generation components, one or more visual properties of at least one of the portion of the two-dimensional user interface element or the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content.

154. The method of any of claims 145-153, including: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a third type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the third type of content is different from the first type of content and the second type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the respective location has a fixed spatial relationship to a viewpoint of a user.

155. The method of claim 154, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the first three-dimensional volume that includes the three- dimensional virtual content corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in a viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint of the user to a second viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the change in the viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at an updated location that has the fixed spatial relationship to the second viewpoint of the user.

156. The method of claim 154 or claim 155, wherein: the determination that the first user interface object is associated with the first type of content includes a determination that the first three-dimensional volume is displayed in a first mode; andthe determination that the first user interface object is associated with the third type of content includes a determination that the first three-dimensional volume is displayed in a second mode, different from the first mode.

157. The method of any of claims 145-156, including: in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a first configuration, associating the first user interface object with the first type of content; and in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a second configuration, different from the first configuration, associating the first user interface object with the second type of content.

158. The method of any of claims 145-157, including: while displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three- dimensional environment, detecting an event corresponding to a change in application content of the first three-dimensional volume; in response to detecting the event corresponding to the change in application content of the first three-dimensional volume, updating, via the one or more display generation components, the display of the first three-dimensional volume to reflect the change in application content, including displaying the first user interface object at an updated location in the three-dimensional environment.

159. The method of any of claims 145-158, including: while displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three- dimensional environment, detecting an event corresponding to a change in application content of the first three-dimensional volume; in response to detecting the event corresponding to the change in application content of the first three-dimensional volume, in accordance with a determination that an orientation of the first user interface object in a current view of the three-dimensional environment has changed from a time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, changing, via the one or more display generation components, an orientation of the first user interface object from a first orientation to a second orientation that is different from the first orientation; andin accordance with a determination that the orientation of the first user interface object in the current view of the three-dimensional environment is the same at the time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, maintaining display of the first user interface object without changing the orientation of the first user interface object from the first orientation to the second orientation.

160. The method of claim 159, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the first user interface object has changed by a first amount from the time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, the first orientation and the second orientation differ by the first amount; in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the first user interface object has changed by a second amount, larger than the first amount, from the time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, the first orientation and the second orientation differ by the first amount; in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the first user interface object has changed by a third amount, larger than the second amount, from the time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, the first orientation and the second orientation differ by a second amount that is larger than the first amount; and in accordance with a determination that the orientation of the first user interface object has changed by a fourth amount, larger than the third amount, from the time when the first user interface object was initially displayed, the first orientation and the second orientation differ by the second amount.

161. The method of any of claims 145-160, including: while displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three- dimensional environment at a respective rotational position, detecting a change in orientation of the first user interface object relative to a viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment; in response to detecting the change in orientation of the first user interface object relative to the viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment: in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a first setting with respect to a characteristic of the first user interface object,further changing an orientation the first user interface object to reduce a difference in orientation of the first user interface object relative to the viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a second setting, different from the first setting, with respect to the characteristic of the first user interface object, maintaining display of the first user interface object without further changing the orientation of the first user interface object.

162. The method of any of claims 145-161, wherein displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three-dimensional environment of the first location in the three-dimensional environment and the second location in the three-dimensional environment includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first size at the respective location in the three-dimensional environment; and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface object at the first size at the respective location in the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in position of a viewpoint of the user relative to the first user interface object from a first viewpoint position to a second viewpoint position; and in response to detecting the change in the position of the viewpoint of the user relative to the first user interface object: in accordance with a determination that a distance between the first user interface object and the second viewpoint position is different than a distance between the first user interface object and the first viewpoint position, changing a size of the first user interface object from the first size to a second size that is different from the first size.

163. The method of any of claims 145-162, wherein displaying the first user interface object at a respective location that has a respective spatial relationship to the first three- dimensional volume, includes: in accordance with a determination that a viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment has a first elevation relative to a reference plane in the three-dimensional environment, the respective location in the three-dimensional environmenthas a first vertical position, relative to the reference plane, that is selected in accordance with the first elevation; and in accordance with a determination that the viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment has a second elevation relative to the reference plane in the three-dimensional environment, the respective location in the three-dimensional environment has a second vertical position, relative to the reference plane, that is selected in accordance with the second elevation, wherein the second elevation is different from the first elevation, and wherein the second vertical position, relative to the reference plane, is different from the first vertical position, relative to the reference plane.

164. The method of any of claims 145-163, including, in conjunction with displaying the first user interface object, visually deemphasizing at least a portion of application content associated with the first three-dimensional volume, wherein the portion of the application content is further from a viewpoint of a user than the first user interface object.

165. The method of any of claims 145-164, including: while displaying the first user interface object at a respective location in the three- dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first change in position of a viewpoint of a user from a first viewpoint position to a second viewpoint position; and in response to detecting the first change in the position of the viewpoint of the user: in accordance with a determination that a distance between the first user interface object and the second viewpoint position is less than a threshold distance, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at an updated location in the three-dimensional environment having the threshold distance to the second viewpoint position, wherein the updated location is different from the respective location; and in accordance with a determination that a distance between the first user interface object and the second viewpoint position is equal to or greater than the threshold distance, maintaining display, via the one or more display generation components, of the first user interface object at the respective location.

166. The method of any of claims 145-165, including:while displaying the first user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input directed toward application content associated with the first three- dimensional volume; in response to detecting the user input directed toward the application content associated with the first three-dimensional volume: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with the second type of content, performing an operation with respect to the application content associated with the first three-dimensional volume; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with the first type of content, forgoing performing the operation with respect to the application content associated with the first three-dimensional volume.

167. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 145-166.

168. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 145-166.

169. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 145-166.

170. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment that includes a first three-dimensional volume that includes three- dimensional virtual content; while displaying the first three-dimensional volume in the first view of the three- dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event for displaying a first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a first type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location has a first spatial relationship to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a second type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second type of content is different from the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a second location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location has a second spatial relationship, different from the first spatial relationship, to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

171. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes a first three-dimensional volume that includes three-dimensional virtual content;while displaying the first three-dimensional volume in the first view of the three- dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event for displaying a first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a first type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first location has a first spatial relationship to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a second type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second type of content is different from the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a second location in the three- dimensional environment, wherein the second location has a second spatial relationship, different from the first spatial relationship, to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

172. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes a first three-dimensional volume that includes three-dimensional virtual content; means, enabled while displaying the first three-dimensional volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting occurrence of a first event for displaying a first user interface object associated with the first three-dimensional volume; and means, enabled in response to detecting the occurrence of the first event, for: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a first type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a first location in thethree-dimensional environment, wherein the first location has a first spatial relationship to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is associated with a second type of content included in the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second type of content is different from the first type of content, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface object at a second location in the three- dimensional environment, wherein the second location has a second spatial relationship, different from the first spatial relationship, to the first three-dimensional volume displayed in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

173. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first request to display a first user interface element; in response to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a second distance, different from the first distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for the first user interface element that is different from the first size for the first user interface element.

174. The method of claim 173, wherein: the first user interface element includes a two-dimensional user interface element that is associated with a portion of three-dimensional virtual content included in a first three- dimensional application volume of a first application; and the first three-dimensional application volume of the first application is displayed, via the one or more display generation components, prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element.

175. The method of claim 173, wherein: the first user interface element includes a two-dimensional user interface element that is associated with a portion of two-dimensional content included in a first three-dimensional application volume of a first application; and the first three-dimensional application volume of the first application is displayed, via the one or more display generation components, prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element.

176. The method of any of claims 173-175, including: while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a second request to display a second user interface element; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the second request to display the second user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the second request to display the second user interface element is a request to display the second user interface element at a third distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second user interface element at the third distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the second user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the second request to display the second user interface element is a request to display the second user interface element at a fourth distance, different from the third distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second user interface element at the fourth distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for thesecond user interface element that is different from the first size for the second user interface element.

177. The method of claim 176, wherein: the first user interface element and the second user interface element are user interface elements of a first type; in accordance with a determination that the first distance between the first user interface element and the first viewpoint of the user is different from the third distance between the second user interface element and the first viewpoint of the user, the first size of the first user interface element is different from the first size of the second user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the second distance between the first user interface element and the first viewpoint of the user is different from the fourth distance between the second user interface element and the first viewpoint of the user, the second size of the first user interface element is different from the second size of the second user interface element.

178. The method of claim 176, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume of a first application that includes three-dimensional virtual content in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a third request to display a third user interface element; in response to detecting the third request to display the third user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the third request to display the third user interface element is a request to display the third user interface element at a first distance from a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the third user interface element at the first distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume with a first size for the third user interface element; andin accordance with a determination that the third request to display the third user interface element is a request to display the third user interface element at a second distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the third user interface element at the second distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume with a second size for the third user interface element that is different from the first size for the third user interface element.

179. The method of claim 178, wherein the first size of the third user interface element is determined based at least in part on: the first distance from the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume and a distance between the first viewpoint of the user and the respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume.

180. The method of any of claims 173-179, wherein: the first three-dimensional application volume includes one or more user interface elements of a first type and one or more user interface elements of a second type, different from the first type; a respective user interface element of the first type has a size that is determined based on a distance between the respective user interface element of the first type and a viewpoint of the user; and a respective user interface element of the second type has a size that is determined based on a distance between the respective user interface element of the second type and a respective portion of the first three-dimensional application volume.

181. The method of any of claims 173-180, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume of a first application that includes three-dimensional virtual content in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein: the first user interface element is associated with a portion of the three- dimensional virtual content; andthe portion of the three-dimensional virtual content is displayed with an initial size in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element with a respective size and at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content, wherein a ratio between the respective size of the first user interface element and the initial size of the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content is a first value; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content at an updated location and with a new size; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element with an updated size, wherein a ratio between the updated size of the first user interface element and the new size of the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content is the first value.

182. The method of any of claims 173-180, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume of a first application that includes three-dimensional virtual content in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first user interface element is associated with a portion of the three-dimensional virtual content; while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at a respective distance with a respective size, from the first viewpoint of the user, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs that corresponds to a request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user, ceasing display of the first user interface element.

183. The method of claim 182, including:after ceasing display of the first user interface element, and while detecting the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user, detecting termination of sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user; in response to detecting termination of the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element.

184. The method of any of claims 173-183, including: while displaying the first user interface element at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to move a portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user to an updated location in the three-dimensional environment, and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to move the portion of the three-dimensional virtual content relative to the first viewpoint of the user to an updated location in the three-dimensional environment: in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a first configuration, changing a size of the first user interface element in a first direction from a first reference point in accordance with the first configuration of the one or more settings of the computer system; and in accordance with a determination that one or more settings of the computer system has a second configuration that is different from the first configuration, changing the size of the first user interface element in a second direction, different from the first direction, from a second reference point that is different from the first reference point, in accordance with the second configuration of the one or more settings of the computer system.

185. The method of claim 184, wherein the first reference point is a fixed reference point.

186. The method of any of claims 173-185, wherein: the second distance from the viewpoint of the user is greater than the first distance from the viewpoint of the user; andthe method includes: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the first request to display the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a third distance from the first viewpoint of the user that is less than the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the third distance from the first viewpoint of the user with the first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a fourth distance from the first viewpoint of the user that is greater than the second distance from the viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the fourth distance from the first viewpoint of the user with the second size for the first user interface element.

187. The method of any of claims 173-186, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; while displaying the first user interface element at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a respective size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint of the user to a second viewpoint of the user; and in response to detecting the change in the viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint of the user to the second viewpoint of the user: in accordance with a determination that a portion of the first three-dimensional application volume associated with the first user interface element is more than a threshold distance from the second viewpoint of the user, ceasing display of the first user interface element.

188. The method of any of claims 173-187, wherein:the first three-dimensional application volume includes one or more user interface elements of a first type and one or more user interface elements of a second type, different from the first type; and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface element at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user, and with a respective size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first change in a viewpoint of the user from a first viewpoint corresponding to the first view of the three-dimensional environment to a second viewpoint corresponding to a second view of the three-dimensional environment; in response to detecting the first change in the viewpoint of the user; maintaining a size of one or more user interface elements of the first type as the viewpoint of the user changes in distance from the one or more user interface elements of the first type; and changing a size of one or more user interface elements of the second type based on a change in a distance of a viewpoint of the user from the one or more user interface elements of the second type; and after changing the size of the one or more user interface elements of the second type and maintaining a size of the one or more user interface elements of the first type, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to interact with the first user interface element; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to interact with the first user interface element, changing a size of one or more user interface elements of the first type based on a change in a distance of a viewpoint of the user from the one or more user interface elements of the first type.

189. The method of any of claims 173-188, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume at a first position in the three-dimensional environment; while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at a respective distance from the first viewpoint of the user, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs that corresponds to a requestto move the first three-dimensional application volume from the first position to a second position in the three-dimensional environment; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs that corresponds to the request to move the first three-dimensional application volume: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first three- dimensional application volume at the second position in the three-dimensional environment; in accordance with a determination that the second position is more than a threshold distance from the first viewpoint of the user, ceasing to display the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination the second position is less than a threshold distance from the first viewpoint of the user, maintaining display, via the one or more display generation components, of the first user interface element.

190. The method of any of claims 173-189, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensional application volume of a first application at a first position in the three-dimensional environment; while displaying the first user interface element at the first position in the three- dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an event corresponding to a change in size of the first user interface element; and in response to detecting the event corresponding to the change in size of the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that a first reference point has been set for resizing the first user interface element, resizing the first user interface element from the first reference point; and in accordance with a determination that a second reference point, different from the first reference point, has been set for resizing the first user interface element, resizing the first user interface element from the second reference point.

191. The method of any of claims 173-190, including: prior to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three-dimensionalapplication volume of a first application at a first position in the three-dimensional environment; while displaying the first user interface element at the first position in the three- dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to change a size of the first three-dimensional application volume; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to change the size of the first three-dimensional application volume: in accordance with a determination that a third reference point has been set for resizing the first three-dimensional application volume, resizing the first three-dimensional application volume from the third reference point; and in accordance with a determination that a fourth reference point, different from the third reference point, has been set for resizing the first three-dimensional application volume, resizing the first three-dimensional application volume from the fourth reference point.

192. The method of any of claims 173-191, including: while displaying the first user interface element at a respective distance of the first distance and the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user, and at a respective size of the first size and the second size, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in the first view of the three-dimensional environment; in response to detecting the change in the first view of the three-dimensional environment: in accordance with a determination that a distance between a current viewpoint of the user and the first user interface element in the current view of the three- dimensional environment has changed as a result of the change in the first view of the three- dimensional environment, changing a size of the first user interface element from a first reference point; and in accordance with a determination that an orientation of the first user interface element as visible from a current viewpoint of the user has changed as a result of the change in the first view of the three-dimensional environment, changing an orientation of the first user interface element about an axis that intersects with the first reference point.

193. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 173-192.

194. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 173-192.

195. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 173-192.

196. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first request to display a first user interface element; in response to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a seconddistance, different from the first distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for the first user interface element that is different from the first size for the first user interface element.

197. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first request to display a first user interface element; in response to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a second distance, different from the first distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for the first user interface element that is different from the first size for the first user interface element.

198. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment, wherein the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user;means, enabled while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first request to display a first user interface element; and means, enabled in response to detecting the first request to display the first user interface element, for: in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a first distance from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the first distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a first size for the first user interface element; and in accordance with a determination that the first request to display the first user interface element is a request to display the first user interface element at a second distance, different from the first distance, from the first viewpoint of the user, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first user interface element at the second distance from the first viewpoint of the user with a second size for the first user interface element that is different from the first size for the first user interface element.

199. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment that includes three-dimensional virtual content and a two- dimensional user interface element; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs that correspond to a first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from a first location in the three-dimensional environment to a second location in the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting one or more inputs that correspond to the first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three-dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment:moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs; and changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation, different from the first orientation, relative to the three-dimensional virtual content.

200. The method of claim 199, including: while displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with a respective orientation of the first orientation or the second orientation, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first change in position of a viewpoint of a user from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint; in response to detecting the first change in the viewpoint of the user: in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second view of the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the second viewpoint; and maintaining display, via the one or more display generation components, of the two-dimensional user interface element with the respective orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element relative to the three-dimensional virtual content in the second view of the three-dimensional environment.

201. The method of claim 200, including, in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are not met, wherein the first criteria are not met when the first change in the position of the viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint does not satisfy an angular criterion of the first criteria, ceasing to display the two-dimensional user interface element.

202. The method of claim 201, including, in accordance with the determination that the first criteria are not met, wherein the first criteria are not met when the first change in the position of the viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint does not satisfy the angular criterion of the first criteria, changing a visual characteristic of at least a portion of the three-dimensional virtual content to reduce a visual emphasis of the portionof the three-dimensional virtual content that is associated with the two-dimensional user interface element.

203. The method of any of claims 199-202, wherein changing the orientation of the two- dimensional user interface element from the first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to the second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content includes changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element with respect to a first axis, more than changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element with respect to a second axis that is different from the first axis.

204. The method of any of claims 199-203, wherein: the first view of the three-dimensional environment corresponds to a first viewpoint of a user; and the first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three-dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment includes a request to center the three-dimensional virtual content with respective to the first viewpoint of the user.

205. The method of any of claims 199-204, wherein the first request to move the three- dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three-dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment includes a movement input after detecting a selection input.

206. The method of any of claims 199-205, including: prior to displaying the two-dimensional user interface element in the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display the two-dimensional user interface element; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the two-dimensional user interface element, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the two-dimensional user interface element with an orientation that is based at least in part on a location of the two-dimensional user interface element relative to a viewpoint corresponding to the first view.

207. The method of any of claims 199-206, including: while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to redisplay the two-dimensional user interface element; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to redisplay the two-dimensional user interface element, displaying the two- dimensional user interface element with an orientation that is based at least in part on the location of the two-dimensional user interface element relative to a viewpoint corresponding to the first view.

208. The method of any of claims 199-207, including: while displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with the second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in viewpoint of a user from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint; and in response to detecting the change in the viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint, changing, via the one or more display generation components, an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the second orientation to a third orientation different from the second orientation, relative to the three- dimensional virtual content.

209. The method of any of claims 199-208, wherein: displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first user interface object that is associated with controlling the three-dimensional environment corresponding to a first three- dimensional application volume, and moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs includes moving the first user interface object in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs; andchanging the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to the second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content includes: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is displayed at a first location, changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element to a first updated orientation; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is displayed at a second location, different from the first location, changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element to a second updated orientation, different from the first updated orientation.

210. The method of claim 209, including: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in a viewpoint of the user from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint; and in response to detecting the change in the viewpoint of the user from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint, and in accordance with a determination that the change in the viewpoint of the user meets second criteria, moving the first user interface object from a first position in the three-dimensional environment to a second position in the three- dimensional environment that is different from the first position in the three-dimensional environment.

211. The method of claim 210, wherein the second criteria include a requirement that second viewpoint is maintained for a threshold duration in order for the second criteria to be met.

212. The method of any of claims 209-211, wherein: displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three- dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the two-dimensional user interface element with a first spatial relationship to the first user interface object; and changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to the second orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content includes maintaining the first spatial relationship of the two-dimensional user interface element to the first user interface object.

213. The method of any of claims 199-212, wherein: displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three- dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the two-dimensional user interface element with a first angle relative to a first axis; and the method includes: while displaying the three-dimensional virtual content at the second location and the two-dimensional user interface element with the second orientation, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the three-dimensional virtual content to a third location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second location is between the first location and the third location; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the three-dimensional virtual content to the third location in the three- dimensional environment: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the three-dimensional virtual content at the third location; and changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the second orientation to a third orientation that is different from the first orientation and the second orientation, including displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with the first angle relative to the first axis.

214. The method of claim 213, wherein: displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three- dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the two-dimensional user interface element with the first angle relative to the first axis and a second angle relative to a second axis that is different from the first axis; and changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the second orientation to the third orientation includes displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with the first angle relative to the first axis and a third angle, different from the second angle, relative to the second axis.

215. The method of claim 214, including: while displaying the three-dimensional virtual content at the second location in the three-dimensional environment and displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with the second orientation, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to a request to move the three-dimensional virtual content to a fourth location in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the third location is between the first location and the fourth location; and in response to detecting the set of one or more user inputs that corresponds to the request to move the three-dimensional virtual content to the fourth location in the three- dimensional environment: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first three- dimensional application volume at the fourth location; and changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the second orientation to a fourth orientation that is different from the first orientation and the second orientation, including displaying the two-dimensional user interface element with the first angle relative to the first axis and with the third angle relative to the second axis, wherein the first angle is different from the third angle.

216. The method of any of claims 199-215, wherein: changing the orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from the first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to the second orientation includes: in accordance with a determination that a first pivot point has been selected for the two-dimensional user interface element, rotating the two-dimensional user interface element about the first pivot point, and in accordance with a determination that a second pivot point, different from the first pivot point, has been selected for the two-dimensional user interface, rotating the two-dimensional user interface element about the second pivot point, different from the first pivot point.

217. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more inputdevices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 199-216.

218. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 199-216.

219. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 199-216.

220. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three- dimensional environment that includes three-dimensional virtual content and a two- dimensional user interface element; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs that correspond to a first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from a first location in the three-dimensional environment to a second location in the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting one or more inputs that correspond to the first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three-dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment: moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs; andchanging an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation, different from the first orientation, relative to the three-dimensional virtual content.

221. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes three-dimensional virtual content and a two- dimensional user interface element; while displaying the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs that correspond to a first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from a first location in the three-dimensional environment to a second location in the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting one or more inputs that correspond to the first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three-dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment: moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs; and changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation, different from the first orientation, relative to the three-dimensional virtual content.

222. A computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first view of a three-dimensional environment that includes three-dimensional virtual content and a two-dimensional user interface element;means, enabled while the first view of the three-dimensional environment that includes the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs that correspond to a first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from a first location in the three- dimensional environment to a second location in the three-dimensional environment; and means, enabled in response to detecting one or more inputs that correspond to the first request to move the three-dimensional virtual content from the first location in the three- dimensional environment to the second location in the three-dimensional environment, for: moving the three-dimensional virtual content and the two-dimensional user interface element in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the one or more inputs; and changing an orientation of the two-dimensional user interface element from a first orientation relative to the three-dimensional virtual content to a second orientation, different from the first orientation, relative to the three-dimensional virtual content.

Images